Table of Contents
Instrument Cluster
12
Warning lights and chimes
Gauges
12
AM/FM stereo with CD/MP3
Auxiliary input jack (Line in)
USB port
19
27
Satellite radio information
Climate Controls
Manual heating and air conditioning
Rear window defroster
38
Lights
39
Headlamps
Turn signal control
Bulb replacement
44
Driver Controls
49
Windshield wiper/washer control
Steering wheel adjustment
Power windows
Mirrors
Cruise control
49
50
54
55
57
59
Moon roof
Locks and Security
67
Keys
Locks
Anti-theft system
67
69
77
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Maintenance and Specifications
253
Engine compartment
Engine oil
Battery
Engine coolant
Fuel information
Air filter(s)
261
265
269
271
277
291
Maintenance product specifications and capacities
Engine data
293
295
Accessories
Index
298
299
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from MNAO. MNAO may change the contents without notice and
without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2008 MNAO
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Mazda product. Please take the
time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook.
The more you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the
safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Mazda and its products visit the following
website:
• In the United States: www.mazdausa.com
• In Canada: www.mazda.ca
Additional owner information is given in separate publications or refer to
the Mazda importers/distributors section in the Customer Assistance
chapter.
This Owner’s Manual describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on the Owner’s Manual when reselling the vehicle. It
is an integral part of the vehicle.
WARNING: In the event of an accident the Fuel pump shut-off
switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine.
The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump
shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of
personal injury to yourself or
others? In this guide, answers to
such questions are contained in
comments highlighted by a bold
WARNING statement. These comments should be read and observed.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow
your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing
of automotive fluids.
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, seat belt
pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material
– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 1,000 miles (1,600 km) before towing a
trailer. For more detailed information about towing a trailer, refer to
Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils since
these additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.
SPECIAL NOTICES
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Mazda
North American Operations, Mazda Canada, and service and repair
facilities may access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct
connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are capable of
collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event. The
recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event.
The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the
occupants, potentially including information such as:
• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled;
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal;
• how fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
To access this information, special equipment must be directly connected
to the recording modules. Mazda North American Operations and Mazda
Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order or where required by law
enforcement, other government authorities or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Mazda North American Operations and Mazda Canada.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Emission warranty
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper to Bumper
Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage and Corrosion Coverage. In addition,
your vehicle is eligible for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance
Warranties. For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not
covered, refer to the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with
your Owner’s Manual.
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
WARNING: Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.
Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
WARNING: Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.
Your vehicle is not equipped with an ambulance preparation package.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Manual
Fasten Seat Belt
Airbag - Side
Protecting the
Environment
Airbag - Front
Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Passenger Airbag Off
Child Seat Tether
Anchor
Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System
Parking Brake System
Brake Fluid -
Non-Petroleum Based
Parking Aid System
Stability Control System
Hazard Warning Flasher
Fuse Compartment
Master Lighting Switch
Fog Lamps-Front
Fuel Pump Reset
Windshield
Defrost/Demist
Windshield Wash/Wipe
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
Power Windows
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Personal Alarm System
Power Window Lockout
Feature
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery
Battery Acid
Fan Warning
Explosive Gas
Power Steering Fluid
MAX
MIN
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
Service Engine Soon
Speed Control
Jack
Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Low Tire Pressure
Warning
Check Fuel Cap
INFORMATION ABOUT THIS GUIDE
The information found in this guide was accurate at the time of printing.
Mazda may change the contents without notice.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Climate controls
(pg. 36)
Audio system
(pg. 19)
Auxiliary input jack
(pg. 27)
USB port*
(pg. 29)
Electronic stability
control
Auxiliary power point
(pg. 53)
(pg. 187)
*if equipped
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause extensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulbs work. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light for additional information.
Service engine soon: The Service
engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned to the on position to check
the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the ЉService engine soonЉ
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the ЉService
engine soonЉ light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing. See the Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
If the
light remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.
Check fuel cap fill inlet:
Illuminates when the fuel cap fill
inlet may not be properly closed.
Continued driving with this light on
may cause the Service engine soon
warning light to come on, refer to
Easy Fuel “no cap” fuel system in the Maintenance and Specification
chapter.
Brake system warning light: To
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the on position
!
P
BRAKE
when the engine is not running, or in a position between on and start, or
by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on
position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this
time, seek service immediately from an authorized Mazda dealer.
Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid
level and the brake system should be inspected immediately by an
authorized Mazda dealer.
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.
Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer. Driving extended
distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and
the risk of personal injury.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS): If
the ABS light stays illuminated or
ABS
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately by an
authorized Mazda dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the
brake system warning light also is illuminated.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
WARNING: If the light remains on, continues to flash or fails to
illuminate, have the system serviced immediately by an
authorized Mazda dealer. With the ABS light on, the anti-lock brake
system is disabled but normal braking is still effective unless the brake
warning light also remains illuminated with the parking brake released.
Airbag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when the ignition is
turned to on, continues to flash or
remains on, have the system
serviced immediately by an authorized Mazda dealer. A chime will also
sound when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system has been
detected.
Seat belt: Reminds you to fasten
your seat belt. A Belt-Minder
chime will also sound to remind you
to fasten your seat belt. Refer to the
Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter to activate/deactivate the Belt-Minder chime feature.
Charging system: Illuminates when
the battery is not charging properly.
Engine oil pressure: Illuminates
when the oil pressure falls below the
normal range, refer to Engine oil in
the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
AdvanceTrac/Traction
Control™: Illuminates when the
AdvanceTrac/Traction Control™ is
active. If the light remains on, have
the system serviced immediately,
refer to the Driving chapter for
more information.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Low tire pressure warning:
Illuminates when your tire pressure
is low. If the light remains on at
start up or while driving, the tire
pressure should be checked. Refer
to Inflating your tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. When
the ignition is first turned to on, the light will illuminate for three
seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light does not turn on or
begins to flash, have the system inspected by your authorized dealer. For
more information on this system, refer to Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Low fuel: Illuminates when the fuel
level in the fuel tank is at or near
empty (refer to Fuel gauge in this
chapter).
Cruise control/Speed control:
Illuminates when the cruise
control/speed control is activated.
Turns off when the cruise
control/speed control system is
deactivated, refer to the Driver
Controls chapter.
Overdrive cancel and grade
assist (if equipped): Illuminates
when the overdrive function of the
transmission has been turned off
and the grade assist function has
been turned on, refer to the Driving chapter.
Anti-theft system: Flashes when
the SecuriLock™ Passive Anti-theft
System has been activated.
Throttle control/Powertrain:
Illuminates when a powertrain fault
has been detected. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Door ajar: Illuminates when the
ignition is in the on position and any
door is open.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door
is opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
Parking brake on chime: Sounds when the parking brake is left on and
the vehicle is driven. If the warning stays on after the park brake is off,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
GAUGES
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section,
the engine is overheating. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
WARNING: When the engine and radiator are hot, scalding
coolant and steam may shoot out under pressure and cause
serious injury. Do not remove the cooling system cap when the engine
and radiator are hot.
Odometer: Registers the total miles
(kilometers) of the vehicle.
Trip odometer: Registers the miles
(kilometers) of individual journeys.
To reset, tap on the trip
SELECT/RESET button to toggle
the display between the TRIP A and
TRIP B. Holding the
SELECT/RESET button for two seconds will reset the trip odometer to
zero.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Tachometer: Indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale may damage the engine.
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the on position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
The arrow near the fuel pump icon
indicates which side of the vehicle
the fuel filler door is located.
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
AUDIO SYSTEMS
AM/FM/single CD or in-dash CD6/MP3 satellite compatible sound
system
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Mazda strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With
this feature, the radio and other electrical accessories may be used for
up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front
door is opened.
Note: Your vehicle is equipped with
a unique audio system. If your
display shows six small circles in the
display, your audio system is a CD6
system. If not, your system is a
Single CD system.
Setting the clock
To set the time, press CLOCK. The display will read SET TIME. Use the
memory preset numbers (0–9) to enter in the desired time–hours and
minutes. The clock will then begin from that time.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
AM/FM Radio
/ VOL (Power/Volume): Press
to turn the radio on/off. Turn the
knob to increase/decrease volume.
If the volume is set above a certain
level and the ignition is turned off,
the volume will come back on at a
nominal listening level when the
ignition is turned back on.
AM/FM: Press repeatedly to select AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
TUNE: Turn the knob to go
up/down the frequency band in
individual increments.
DIRECT: Press DIRECT and then select the desired radio frequency
(i.e. 93.9) using the memory preset numbers (0–9).
SEEK/TRACK: Press
SEEK/TRACK
to access the
previous/next strong radio station.
SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of all strong radio stations.
MEMORY PRESETS (0–9): When
tuned to any station, press and hold
a preset button until sound returns
and PRESET # SAVED appears in
the display. You can save up to 30
stations, 10 in AM, 10 in FM1 and FM2.
Saving presets automatically (Autoset)– Autoset allows you to set the
strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set
preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
To activate the autoset feature: Press MENU repeatedly until AUTO
PRESET ON/OFF appears in the display. Use
SEEK/TRACK
to
toggle AUTO PRESET to ON, and either wait five seconds for the search
to initiate or press OK to immediately initiate the search. If you press
another control within those five seconds, the search will not initiate; the
10 strongest stations will be filled and the station stored in preset 1 will
begin playing.
If there are fewer then 10 strong stations, the system will store the last
one in the remaining presets.
RDS Radio
Available only in FM mode. This feature allows you to search
RDS-equipped stations for a certain category of music format: CLASSIC,
COUNTRY, JAZZ/RB, ROCK, etc.
To activate: Press MENU repeatedly until RDS (ON/OFF) appears in the
display. Use
SEEK/TRACK
to toggle RDS ON/OFF. When RDS is
OFF, you will not be able to search for RDS equipped stations or view
the station name or type.
CAT/FOLD(Category/Folder): This feature allows you to select from
various music categories.
To change RDS categories: Press MENU repeatedly until RBDS ON/OFF
appears in the display. Use
PRESS UP OR DOWN TO CHANGE RDS CATEGORY will appear in the
display. Press to scroll through all possible categories. When the
desired category appears in the display, press SEEK/TRACK to
/
to toggle RDS to ON. Press CAT.
/
find the next station playing that selection or press SCAN for a brief
sampling of all stations playing that category of music.
CD/MP3 Player
CD: Press to enter CD/MP3 mode. If a disc is already loaded into the
system, CD/MP3 play will begin where it ended last. If no CD is loaded,
NO DISC will appear in the display.
LOAD:
For a single CD system– This control is not operational. To load a CD,
simply insert the disc, label side up, into the CD slot.
For a CD6 system– Press LOAD. When the display reads SELECT
SLOT, choose the desired slot number using memory presets 1–6. When
the display reads LOAD CD #, load the desired disc, label side up. If you
do not choose a slot within five seconds, the system will choose for you.
Once loaded, the first track will begin to play.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
To auto load up to six discs– Press and hold LOAD until the display
reads AUTOLOAD #. Load the desired disc, label side up. The system
will prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots. Insert the
discs, one at a time, label side up, when prompted. Once loaded, the disc
in preset #1 will begin to play.
Press the number preset buttons (1–6) to choose the disc you want to
play.
EJECT:
For a single CD system– press EJECT to eject the CD.
For a CD6 system– press EJECT and select the desired CD slot by
pressing the corresponding memory preset number. The display will read
EJECTING #. When the system has ejected the CD, the display will read
REMOVE CD #. Remove the CD. If you do not remove the CD, the
system will reload the disc.
To auto eject all loaded discs– Press and hold EJECT. The system will
eject all discs and prompt you when to remove them.
/
Play/Pause: Press to
play/pause a track when playing a
CD.
SEEK/TRACK: Press
SEEK/TRACK
to access the
previous/next track.
CAT (Category) / FOLD (Folder):
In MP3 mode only– Press CAT/FOLD and then press
SEEK/TRACK
to access the previous/next folder.
SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current disc or
MP3 folder.
DIRECT:
In CD mode– Press DIRECT. The display will read DIRECT TRACK
MODE SELECT TRACK. Enter the desired track number using the
memory preset buttons (0–9). The system will then begin playing that
track.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
In MP3 folder mode– Press DIRECT and the memory preset buttons
(0–9) of the desired folder. The system will advance to that specific
folder.
TEXT:
In MP3 mode only– Press TEXT repeatedly to view Album (AL), Folder
(FL), Song (SO) and Artist (AR) in the display, if available.
In TEXT MODE– Sometimes the display requires additional text to be
displayed. When the < / > indicator is active, press TEXT and then
press
COMPRESSION: Press MENU repeatedly until COMPRESSION ON/OFF
appears in the display. Use SEEK/TRACK to toggle between
SEEK/TRACK
to view the additional display text.
ON/OFF. When COMPRESSION is ON, the system will bring the soft and
loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level.
SHUFFLE: Press MENU repeatedly until SHUFFLE ON/OFF appears in
the display. Use
SEEK/TRACK
to toggle between ON/OFF. If
you wish to engage shuffle mode right away, press
SEEK/TRACK
to begin random play. Otherwise, random play
will begin when the current track is finished playing. The system will
only shuffle the disc currently playing.
Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
SIRIUS: Press to access satellite radio mode, if equipped. Press
repeatedly to cycle through SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 modes.
TUNE/OK: Turn the knob to go to
the next / previous available SIRIUS
satellite station.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
DIRECT: Press DIRECT then enter the desired channel (i.e. 002) using
the memory preset buttons (0–9). If you only enter one digit, press OK
and the system will go to that satellite channel. If you enter three digits,
the system will automatically go to that channel, if available. You may
cancel your entry by pressing DIRECT. If an invalid station number is
entered, INVALID CHANNEL will appear in the display and the system
will continue playing the current station.
SEEK/TRACK: Press
SEEK/TRACK
to seek to
the previous/next channel. If a
specific category is selected, (Jazz,
Rock, News, etc.), press
SEEK/TRACK
the previous/next channel in the selected category. Press and hold
SEEK/TRACK to fast seek through the previous/next channels.
to seek to
SCAN: Press SCAN for a brief sampling of all available SIRIUS satellite
channels. If a specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.) press
SCAN for a brief sampling of all available SIRIUS satellite channels within
the selected category.
MEMORY PRESETS (0–9): There
are 30 available presets, 10 each for
SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save
satellite channels in your memory
presets, tune to the desired channel
then press and hold a memory preset number (0–9) until sound returns.
TEXT: Press and release to display the artist and song title. While in
TEXT MODE, press again to scroll through the Artist (AR), Song (SO),
Channel (CH) and Category (CA).
In TEXT MODE: Sometimes the display requires additional text to be
displayed. When the < / > indicator is active, press TEXT and then
press
SEEK/TRACK
to view the additional display text.
CAT (Category) / FOLD (Folder): Press to toggle between turning
the most recently selected satellite radio category on or off. The category
icon (CAT) will illuminate in the display when a specific category is
selected (the icon will not illuminate during CATEGORY ALL). If no
category has ever been selected, NO CATEGORY SELECTED will display.
Note: Separate categories can be set for SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3.
Refer to Satellite radio menu for further information on selecting a
satellite radio category.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
SATELLITE RADIO MENU: Press MENU when satellite radio mode is
active to access. Press OK to enter into the satellite radio menu.
Press
/
to cycle through the following options:
• CATEGORY: Press OK to enter category mode. Press
/
to
scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop,
Rock, News, etc.) Press OK when the desired category appears in the
display. After a category is selected, press SEEK to search for that
specific category of channels only (i.e. ROCK). You may also select
CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels.
Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
• SAVE SONG: Press OK to save the currently playing song’s title in
the system’s memory. (If you try to save something other than a song,
CANT SAVE will appear in the display.) When the chosen song is
playing on any satellite radio channel, the system will alert you with
an audible prompt. Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and
the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song. You
can save up to 20 song titles. If you attempt to save more than 20
titles, the display will read REPLACE SONG? Press OK to access the
saved titles and press
/
to cycle through the saved titles. When
the song title appears in the display that you would like to replace,
press OK. SONG REPLACED will appear in the display.
• DELETE SONG: Press OK to delete a song from the system’s
memory. Press
/
to cycle through the saved songs. When the
song appears in the display that you would like to delete, press OK.
The song will appear in the display for confirmation. Press OK again
and the display will read SONG DELETED. If you do not want to
delete the currently listed song, press
RETURN or CANCEL.
/
to select either
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
• DELETE ALL SONGS: Press OK to delete all song’s from the
system’s memory. The display will read ARE YOU SURE ? Press OK to
confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL
DELETED.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
• ENABLE ALERTS / DISABLE ALERTS: Press OK to enable/disable
the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are
playing on a satellite radio channel. (The system default is disabled.)
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
SONG ALERTS ENABLED/DISABLED will appear in the display. The
menu listing will display the opposite state. For example, if you have
chosen to enable the song alerts, the menu listing will read DISABLE
as the alerts are currently on, so your other option is to turn them off.
Sound Adjustments
Press SOUND repeatedly to cycle through the following features:
BASS: Press
SEEK/TRACK
SEEK/TRACK
SEEK/TRACK
to adjust the level of bass.
to adjust the level of treble.
to adjust the audio between
TREBLE: Press
BALANCE: Press
the left (L) and right (R) speakers.
FADE: Press SEEK/TRACK
back (B) and front (F) speakers.
to adjust the audio between the
SPEED COMPENSATED VOLUME (if equipped): With this feature
on, radio volume automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed
to compensate for road and wind noise.
The default setting is off.
Use
SEEK/TRACK
to adjust between SPEED OFF and levels
1–7: Increasing the level from 1 (lowest setting) to 7 (highest setting)
allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with vehicle
speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Recommended level is 1–3; SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7
is the maximum setting.
ALL SEATS (Occupancy mode, if equipped): Press SOUND
repeatedly to reach the Occupancy mode setting. Press
SEEK/TRACK
to select and optimize sound for ALL SEATS,
DRIVERS SEAT or REAR SEATS.
Extra Features
AUX: Press to reach LINE IN (auxiliary audio mode).
For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode, refer to
Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter.
(Phone): This feature is not active.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
TUNE/OK: Your vehicle may be
equipped with features which will
require you to confirm commands
by pressing OK.
Auxiliary input jack (Line in)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Mazda strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Auxiliary Input Jack (AIJ). The
Auxiliary Input Jack provides a way
to connect your portable music
player to the in-vehicle audio
system. This allows the audio from a
portable music player to be played
through the vehicle speakers with
high fidelity. To achieve optimal
performance, please observe the
following instructions when
attaching your portable music
device to the audio system.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Required equipment:
1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones
2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)
connectors at each end
To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.
2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully
charged and that the device is turned off.
3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone
output of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable
to the AIJ in your vehicle.
4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded
into the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the
volume.
6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE, LINE IN or
SYNC LINE IN appears in the display.
You should hear audio from your portable music player although it
may be low.
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between
the AUX and FM or CD controls.
Troubleshooting:
1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level
outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not
compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with
devices that have a headphone output with a volume control.
2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio
system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality.
Many portable music players have different output levels, so not all
players should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound
best at full volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.
3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the
portable music player volume down. If the problems persists, replace
or recharge the batteries in the portable music player.
4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner
when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control
(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your
portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is
moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure
location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the
vehicle is in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough
to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while the
vehicle is in motion.
USB port (if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Mazda strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
USB port located on the instrument
panel. This feature allows you to
plug in media playing devices,
memory sticks, and also to charge
devices if they support this feature.
For further information on this
feature, refer to Accessing and
using your USB port in the SYNC
supplement or Navigation system
supplement.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio frequencies:
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors:
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CD/CD player care
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only.
(Never touch the playing
surface).
• Inspect discs before playing.
• Clean only with an approved CD
cleaner.
• Wipe discs from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Clean using a circular motion.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Mazda CD players.
Do not use any irregular shaped
CDs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.
CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be
inserted into the CD player as
the label may peel and cause the
CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with
permanent felt tip marker rather
than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Audio system warranty and service
Refer to the Warranty Guide/Customer Information Guide for audio
system warranty information. If service is necessary, see your authorized
Mazda dealership.
MP3 track and folder structure
Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure
as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track mode
(system default) and MP3 folder mode. For more information on track
and folder mode, refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following
section.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255.
Note: The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less
depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio
present.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
• MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted
by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from
F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation
through the disc files.
Sample MP3 structure
If you are burning your own MP3
discs, it is important to understand
how the system will read the
structures you create. While various
files may be present, (files with
extensions other than mp3), only
files with the .mp3 extension will be
played. Other files will be ignored
by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 disc for a variety
of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in vehicle
system.
.mp3
.mp3
1
1
2
3
.mp3
2
3
4
5
.mp3
.mp3
.mp3
4
6
7
.mp3
.doc
.ppt
.xls
In track mode, the system will display and play the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files will be played, regardless of being in a
specific folder). In folder mode, the system will only play the .mp3 files
in the current folder.
Satellite radio information (if equipped)
Satellite radio channels: SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music, news,
sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels,
visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.sirius-canada.ca in
Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1–888–539–7474.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio
system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite
radio reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an
audio mute.
Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is
a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate the interference.
SIRIUS satellite radio service: SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription
based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and
entertainment programming. A service fee is required in order to receive
SIRIUS service. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed
SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include:
• Hardware and limited subscription term, which begins on the date of
sale or lease of the vehicle.
• Use of online media player providing access to all SIRIUS music
channels over the internet using any computer connected to the
internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474.
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you.
Mazda Motor Corporation shall not be responsible for any such
programming changes.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN): This 12–digit
Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your
satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating
with SIRIUS. While in Satellite Radio mode, you can view this number on
the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Radio Display
ACQUIRING
Condition
Action Required
No action required.
This message should
disappear shortly.
Radio requires more
than two seconds to
produce audio for the
selected channel.
Internal module or
system failure
SAT FAULT
If this message does
not clear within a short
period of time, or with
an ignition key cycle,
your receiver may have
a fault. See your
present.
authorized dealer for
service.
INVALID CHNL
Channel no longer
available.
This previously
available channel is no
longer available. Tune
to another channel. If
the channel was one of
your presets, you may
choose another channel
for that preset button.
Contact SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474 to
subscribe to the
UNSUBSCRIBED
NO TEXT
Subscription not
available for this
channel.
channel or tune to
another channel.
Artist information not Artist information not
available.
available at this time on
this channel. The
system is working
properly.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Radio Display
NO TEXT
Condition
Action Required
Song title information Song title information
not available.
not available at this
time on this channel.
The system is working
properly.
NO TEXT
Category information
not available.
Category information
not available at this
time on this channel.
The system is working
properly.
NO SIGNAL
Loss of signal from
the SIRIUS satellite or
SIRIUS tower to the
vehicle antenna.
You are in a location
that is blocking the
SIRIUS signal (i.e.,
tunnel, under an
overpass, dense foliage,
etc). The system is
working properly. When
you move into an open
area, the signal should
return.
UPDATING
Update of channel
programming in
progress.
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
CALL SIRIUS
1–888–539–7474
Satellite service has
been deactivated by
SIRIUS Satellite
Radio.
Call SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474 to
re-activate or resolve
subscription issues.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
1.
2.
Fan speed adjustment: Turn to select fan speed.
R
Rear defroster: Press to activate/deactivate the rear window
defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for
more information.
3.
Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield
defroster vents and demister vents. Can be used to clear the
windshield of fog and thin ice. The system will automatically provide
outside air to reduce window fogging. Press this button again to
return to the previous air flow selection.
4.
5.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents,
demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. The system will
automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
Power: Press to activate/deactivate the climate control system.
When the system is off, outside air is prevented from entering the
vehicle through the vents.
6.
7.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, demister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents (if equipped).
8.
: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and rear
seat floor vents (if equipped).
9. Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the airflow in
the vehicle.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
10.
11.
Passenger heated seat control (if equipped): Press to
activate/deactivate the passenger heated seat. See Heated seats in
the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation
in the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time
needed to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help
reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle.
Recirculated air engages automatically when MAX A/C is selected or
can be engaged manually in any airflow mode except
(defrost).
Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow modes
except MAX A/C. When the ignition switch is turned off and back on,
the climate system will return to the recirculated air mode only if
the A/C button LED is illuminated and the air distribution selection
is either
(panel) or
(panel/floor).
12. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more
economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce
undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. Press the MAX A/C
button again for normal A/C operation.
13. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with recirculated
air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages
automatically in MAX A/C,
(defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
14.
Driver heated seat control (if equipped): Press to
activate/deactivate the driver heated seat. See Heated seats in the
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
Outside temperature (if equipped): The outside temperature will
appear in the display and is labeled EXT TEMP.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather,
select
(defrost) or
(floor/defrost).
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
system off or with (recirculated air) engaged and A/C off.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the time to reach comfort in hot weather, drive with the
windows slightly open for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the
vehicle has been “aired out.”
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for
extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in the
MAX A/C position, reduce blower fan speed from the highest setting and
put the vehicle’s transmission into the PARK gear position (automatic
transmission only) to continue to receive cool air from your A/C system.
For maximum cooling performance in MAX A/C mode:
1. Select MAX A/C.
2. Select the coolest temperature setting.
3. Set the fan to the highest speed initially. As the interior starts to
cool down, adjust the fan speed to maintain comfort.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
R
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and
works to clear the rear window of fog and thin ice.
The engine must be running to operate the rear window defroster.
R
Press
to turn the rear window defroster on. An indicator light on the
button will illuminate when active. The rear window defroster turns off
automatically after a predetermined amount of time, if a low battery
condition is detected or when the ignition is turned off or to the
accessory position. To manually turn off the rear window defroster at any
time, press the control again.
If your vehicle is equipped with both rear defroster and heated mirrors,
the same button will activate both. Refer to Heated outside mirrors in
the Driver Controls chapter.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside or the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Rotate the headlamp control to the
first position
to turn on the
parking lamps.
Rotate to the second position
turn on the headlamps.
to
Rotate back to
headlamps off.
to turn the
Fog lamp control (if equipped)
The headlamp control also operates
the fog lamps. The fog lamps can be
turned on when the headlamp
control is in the
,
or
positions and the high beams are
not turned on.
Pull the headlamp control towards
you to turn the fog lamps on. The
fog lamp indicator light
illuminate.
will
High beams
After turning the headlamps on,
push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the lowbeam headlamps on with a reduced output.
To activate:
• the ignition must be in the on position.
• the headlamp control must be in the off, parking lamps or autolamp
position.
• with automatic transmission, the transmission is not in P (Park),
• with manual transmission, the parking brake must be released.
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at
dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL) system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not
provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate
your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
switches in the vehicle during
headlamp and parking lamp
operation.
Move the control to the full upright
position, past detent, to turn on the
interior lamps.
Rotate to full down position (past
detent) to prevent interior lamps
from illuminating when the doors are opened.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is
installed, the dimmer switch requires re-calibration. Rotate the dimmer
switch from the full dim position to the full Dome/ON position to reset.
This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting
conditions.
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
Vertical aim adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level
surface, approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meter)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the
center of your headlamp to the
ground and mark an 8 foot
(2.4 meter) horizontal reference
line on the vertical wall or
screen at this height (a piece of masking tape works well). The
center of the lamp is marked by a 3.0 mm circle on the headlamp
lens.
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen
and open the hood. Cover the left-hand headlamp with an opaque
cloth.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with a
distinct horizontal edge of high
intensity light towards the right.
If this edge is not at the
horizontal reference line, the
beam will need to be adjusted.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
the headlamp, then use a 4 mm
socket to turn the adjuster
either counterclockwise (to
adjust up) or clockwise (to
adjust down) aligning the upper
edge of the light pattern to the
horizontal line.
6. Move the opaque cloth to cover
the right-hand headlamp and
repeat Steps 4 and 5 for the
left-hand headlamp.
7. HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS
NON-ADJUSTABLE.
8. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
INTERIOR LAMPS
Dome lamps and map lamps
The front dome lamp is located overhead between the driver and
passenger seats.
The dome lamp control has three
positions:
• OFF: In this position, the lamp
will not illuminate when the doors
are open or when attempting to
turn the dome lamp on by fully
rotating the dimmer control
located on the instrument panel.
• DOOR: In this position, the dome lamp will illuminate only when a
door is opened and will remain illuminated for 25 seconds after the
door is shut.
• ON: In this position, the lamp will remain illuminated.
The map lamp controls (without
moon roof) are located on the dome
lamp. Press the button on either
side of each map lamp to illuminate
the lamps. Push the button again to
turn off the lamps.
For models equipped with a moon
roof, the map lamps are located on
the moon roof control panel. Press
the button on either side of each
map lamp to illuminate the lamps.
Push the button again to turn off
the lamps.
The map lamps will illuminate
whenever a door is opened. After
the door is shut, the lamps will remain illuminated for 25 seconds.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Cargo and dome lamp
Rear cargo lamp equipped with an
ON/OFF/DOOR control will light
when:
• the doors are closed and the
control is in the ON position.
• the control is in the DOOR
position and any door is open.
When the control is in the OFF position, it will not illuminate when you
open the doors.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the vents, condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When normal condensation occurs, a thin
film of mist can form on the interior of the lens. The thin mist eventually
clears and exits through the vents during normal operation. Clearing
time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets)
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens
Examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp water
leak) are:
• Water puddle inside the lamp
• Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
the lens
Take your vehicle to dealer for service if any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America to ensure
lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe visibility.
Note: The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the
lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Function
Number of bulbs
Trade number
Headlamps (high and
low beams)
2
H13
Park/turn/sidemarker
lamps (front)
Rear
stop/tail/sidemarker
Backup lamp
Fog lamp (front)
Center High-mount
stop lamp
2
2
3157A (amber)
3157K / 4157K
2
2
5
921
9145
W5WL
168
Rear license plate
lamp
2
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer
Replacing the interior bulbs
Check the operation of the following interior bulbs frequently:
• Courtesy/Reading lamp
For bulb replacement, see an authorized Mazda dealer.
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Replacing headlamp bulbs
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the off position.
2. Open the hood.
3. Reach over the front bolster.
4. Remove the bulb by turning it
counterclockwise and then
pulling it straight out.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
WARNING: Handling Halogen Bulbs: When a halogen bulb
breaks, it is dangerous. These bulbs contain pressurized gas. If
one is broken, it will explode and serious injuries could be caused by
the flying glass. If the glass portion of the bulb is touched with bare
hands, body oil could cause the bulb to overheat and explode when lit.
Never touch the glass portion of the bulb with your bare hands and
always wear eye protection when handling or working around halogen
bulbs.
5. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the bulb.
WARNING: Children and
Halogen Bulbs: Playing with
a halogen bulb is dangerous.
Serious injuries could be caused
by dropping a halogen bulb or
breaking in some other way.
Always keep halogen bulbs out of
the reach of children.
6. Connect the electrical connector on the new bulb.
7. Insert the glass end of the new bulb into the headlamp assembly.
When the grooves in the plastic base are aligned, turn the new bulb
clockwise to install.
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs
For bulb replacement, see your authorized Mazda dealer.
Replacing tail/stop/turn/backup lamp bulbs
The tail/stop/turn/sidemarker/backup lamp bulbs are located in the same
portion of the tail lamp assembly, one just below the other. Follow the
same steps to replace either bulb:
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
1. Make sure the headlamp switch
is in the off position and then
open the liftgate to expose the
lamp assembly screws.
2. Remove the two screws from
the lamp assembly.
3. Carefully remove the lamp
assembly away from the vehicle
by pulling the assembly straight
out to expose the bulb socket.
DO NOT TIP THE LAMP ASSEMBLY SIDEWAYS.
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp
assembly.
5. Pull bulb straight out of socket and push in the new bulb.
6. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise.
7. Carefully install the tail lamp assembly on the vehicle and secure
with two screws.
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch
is in the off position.
2. Depress the lever and carefully
pry the license plate lamp
assembly (located above the
license plate) from the liftgate.
3. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove
from lamp assembly.
4. Pull bulb straight out of socket
and push in the new bulb.
5. Install the bulb socket into the
lamp assembly and rotate
clockwise.
6. To install, carefully press the
lamp assembly into liftgate.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Replacing high-mount brake lamp bulbs
To remove the lamp assembly:
1. Remove the two screws and
move the lamp assembly away
from the liftgate.
2. Remove the bulb holder from
the lamp assembly by
depressing the snaps.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket and push in the new
bulb.
To complete installation, follow the
removal procedure in reverse order.
Replacing fog lamp bulbs (if equipped)
1. Make sure the fog lamp switch
is in the off position.
2. From underneath the vehicle,
carefully disconnect the
electrical connector from the
bulb.
3. Remove the bulb from the lamp
assembly by pulling out on the
bulb while squeezing on the
upper and lower snap clips at
the same time.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate towards you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.
Note: Heavy ice and snow can jam the wiper blades and overheat the
wiper motor. If this happens, the motor will automatically stop the
operation of the blades for a short period of time. If this happens while
driving, turn off the wiper switch, park off the right-of-way, and remove
the snow and ice. After a short period of time, turn the switch on and
the blades should operate normally. If they don’t resume functioning,
consult an authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible. Wait until the
weather clears before trying to drive with the wipers inoperative.
Windshield washer: Push the end
of the stalk:
• briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
• a quick push and hold: the wipers
will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• a long push and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for
up to ten seconds.
Courtesy wipe feature: One extra wipe will occur a few seconds after
washing the front window to clear any excess washer fluid remaining on
the windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Rear window wiper/washer controls
For rear wiper operation, rotate the
rear window wiper and washer
control to the desired position.
Select:
INT 2 — Normal speed operation of
rear wiper.
INT 1 — Intermittent operation of
rear wiper.
OFF — Rear wiper and washer off.
For rear wash cycle, rotate (and hold as desired) the rear wiper/washer
control to either
position.
From either position, the control will automatically return to the INT 2
or OFF position.
MANUAL TILT STEERING COLUMN
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull down the steering column
tilt lever.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down until you find the desired
location.
3. Push the steering column tilt
lever up. This will lock the
steering wheel in position.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
WARNING: Adjusting the steering wheel while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Moving it can very easily cause the driver
to abruptly turn to the left or right. This can lead to loss of control or
an accident. Never adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is
moving.
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamps.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package.
Storage compartment (if equipped)
Press the OPEN control to open the
storage compartment. The door will
open slightly and can be moved to
full open.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
CENTER CONSOLE
Your vehicle is equipped with a variety of console features. These
include:
1. Cupholders
2. Utility compartment console lid
has a CD holder, a business card
holder and two pen holders.
The utility compartment has a
removable bin with coin holder
slots, a sliding tray, a cell phone
holder and CD holders
3. Rear power point
4. Rear cupholders
5. Small storage trays
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholders. Hard objects
can injure you in a collision.
The tray and inside bin can be
removed to open up space to fit a
laptop computer, MP3 players, CDs
or handbags. To remove, open the
console lid and pull the bin straight
up and out from the console
housing.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
The sliding tray and inside bin can
be hooked on the side or rear of the
console for extra storage.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)
WARNING: Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlet as this will
damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of
accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
The auxiliary power point is located
in front of the gearshift and on the
rear side of the center console.
Do not use the power point for
operating the cigarette lighter
element (if equipped).
To prevent the fuse from being
blown, do not use the power
point(s) over the vehicle capacity of
12 VDC/180W. If the power point or
cigar lighter socket is not working, a fuse may have blown. Refer to
Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information
on checking and replacing fuses.
To have full capacity usage of your power point, the engine is required to
be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery. To prevent
the battery from being discharged:
• do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running,
• do not leave battery chargers, video game adapters, computers and
other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for
extended periods.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
Cigarette/Cigar lighter (if equipped)
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter
socket.
Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating, this will
damage the lighter element and socket. The lighter will be released from
its heating position when it is ready to be used.
Note: Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your
warranty, and can result in fire or serious injury.
POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
Press and pull the window switches
to open and close windows.
• Push down (to the first detent)
and hold the switch to open.
• Pull up and hold the switch to
close.
Rear Window Buffeting: When one or both of the rear windows are
open, the vehicle may demonstrate a wind throb or buffeting noise; this
noise can be alleviated by lowering a front window approximately two to
three inches.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
One touch down (AUTO)
Allows the driver’s window to open
fully without holding the control
down. Push the switch completely
down to the second detent and
release quickly. The window will
open fully. Momentarily press the
switch to any position to stop the
window operation.
Window lock
The window lock feature allows only
the driver to operate the power
windows.
To lock out all the window controls
(except for the driver’s) press the
right side of the control. Press the
left side to restore the window
controls.
Accessory delay
With accessory delay, power windows and moonroof operate for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned from the accessory or on
to the off position, the key is not in the ignition or until either front door
is opened.
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power windows or moon roof.
They may seriously injure themselves.
INTERIOR MIRROR
The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm
which lets you adjust the mirror UP or DOWN and from SIDE to SIDE.
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power side view mirrors
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Rotate the control clockwise to
adjust the right mirror and
rotate the control
counterclockwise to adjust the
left mirror.
2. Move the control in the
direction you wish to tilt the
mirror.
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
Fold-away mirrors
Fold the side mirrors in carefully
when driving through a narrow
space, like an automatic car wash.
Heated outside mirrors
(if equipped)
Both mirrors are heated
automatically to remove ice, mist
and fog when the rear window
defrost is activated.
Do not remove ice from the
mirrors with a scraper or
attempt to readjust the mirror
glass if it is frozen in place.
These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
With cruise control/speed control set, you can maintain a set speed
without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
WARNING: Using cruise control in the following conditions
could cause you to lose control of the vehicle:
• Heavy or unsteady traffic
• Slippery or winding roads
• Similar restrictions that require inconsistent speed
Don’t use cruise control in these situations.
Setting speed control
The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and
release it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET + control and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
5. The indicator light
on the
instrument cluster will turn on.
Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
Disengaging speed control
To disengage the speed control:
• Tap the brake pedal or clutch pedal (if equipped)
Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed.
Note: When you use the clutch pedal to disengage the speed control,
the engine speed may briefly increase, this is normal.
Resuming a set speed
Press the RESUME control and
release it. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously
set speed.
Increasing speed while using speed control
There are three ways to set a higher
speed:
• Press and hold the SET + control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
• Press and release the SET +
control to operate the Tap-Up
function. Each tap will increase
the set speed by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET + control.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Reducing speed while using speed control
There are three ways to reduce a
set speed:
• Press and hold the SET- control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
• Press and release the SET-
control to operate the Tap-Down
function. Each tap will decrease
the set speed by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
• Depress the brake pedal or the
clutch pedal (if equipped) until
the desired vehicle speed is
reached, press the SET + control.
Turning off speed control
There are two ways to turn off the
speed control:
• Press the OFF control.
• Turn off the ignition.
Note: When you turn off the speed
control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
You can move the glass panel of the moon roof back to open or tilt up
(from the closed position) to ventilate the vehicle.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
WARNING: Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave
children unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt
themselves.
To open the moon roof: The moon
roof is equipped with an automatic,
one-touch, opening, closing and
venting feature. Press and release
the rear portion of the control. To
stop motion at any time during the
one-touch operation, press the
control a second time.
WARNING: When closing the moon roof, you should verify that
it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are
not in the proximity of the moon roof opening.
To close the moon roof: The moon roof is equipped with an automatic,
one-touch, closing feature. Press and release the front portion of the
control. To stop motion at any time during the one-touch closing, press
the control again.
Bounce-back: When an obstacle has been detected in the moon roof
opening as the moon roof is closing, the moon roof will automatically
open and stop at a prescribed position. This is known as “bounce-back”.
If the ignition is turned off (without accessory delay being active) during
bounce-back, the moon roof will move until the bounce-back position is
reached.
Bounce-back override: To override bounce-back, press and hold the
front portion of the control. For example: Bounce-back can be used to
overcome the resistance of ice on the moon roof or seals. If during a
bounce-back condition, the control is released to the neutral position,
then held in the one-touch position within two seconds after the moon
roof reaches the bounce-back position, the moon roof will travel with
no bounce-back protection. If the control is released before the moon
roof reaches fully closed or the ignition is turned off (without accessory
delay being active), the moon roof will stop. Security override can be
used if the moon roof movement is restricted in some way, for example,
if there is ice on the moon roof or seals.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
To vent:
• The moon roof is equipped with an automatic, one-touch, vent feature.
To tilt the moon roof into the vent position (when the glass panel is
closed), press and release the front portion of the control.
• To close the moon roof from the vent position, press and hold the rear
portion of the control until the glass panel stops moving.
The moon roof has a sliding shade that can be opened or closed when
the glass panel is shut. To close the shade, pull it toward the front of the
vehicle.
Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is
installed, the moon roof needs to be opened to the vent position to reset
the moon roof positions.
Note: If you open and close the moon roof repeatedly, the moon roof
motor may overheat and shut down for 45 seconds while the motor
cools.
Accessory delay: With accessory delay, the window switches, audio
system, and moon roof (if equipped) may be used for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned off or until either front door is opened.
LIFTGATE
• To open the liftgate window,
unlock the liftgate (with the
power door locks or the remote
entry) and push the right side
control button under the license
plate lamp shield.
• To open the liftgate, unlock the
liftgate (with the power door
locks or the remote entry) and
push the middle control button
under the license plate lamp
shield.
To lock the liftgate and the liftgate window, use the power door locks.
Do not open the liftgate or liftgate glass in a garage or other enclosed
area with a low ceiling. If the liftgate glass is raised and the liftgate is
also opened, both liftgate and glass could be damaged against a low
ceiling.
Do not leave the liftgate or liftgate glass open while driving. Doing so
could cause serious damage to the liftgate and its components as well as
allowing carbon monoxide to enter the vehicle.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
WARNING: Make sure that the liftgate door and/or window are
closed to prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the
vehicle. Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide which can injure your
lungs and cause drowsiness and even death. This will also prevent
passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the
liftgate door or window open, keep the vents open so outside air comes
into the vehicle.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo shade (if equipped)
If your vehicle has a cargo shade, you can use it to cover items in the
cargo area of your vehicle.
To install the shade:
• Insert the ends of the cargo
shade into the mounting features
located behind the rear seat on
the rear trim panels.
To operate the shade:
1. Grasp the handle at the rear
edge of the shade and pull
rearward.
2. Secure both ends of the support
rod into the retention slots located on the rear quarter trim panels.
WARNING: Ensure that the posts are properly latched in
mounting features. The cover may cause injury in a sudden stop
or accident if it is not securely installed.
WARNING: Do not place any objects on the cargo area shade.
They may obstruct your vision or strike occupants of vehicle in
the case of a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING: Not securing luggage or cargo while driving is
dangerous as it could move or be crushed during sudden braking
or a collision and cause injury. Make sure luggage and cargo is secured
before driving.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Cargo management system (if equipped)
The cargo management system consists of two storage compartments
located in the floor of the rear cargo area.
1. The larger, rearward,
compartment is for customer
storage.
• To open, lift the lid with the
pull latch. The lid can be
removed to allow for flexible
storage.
• To close, lower the lid and
press down at the latch area
until you hear the latch engage.
A pad lock or combination lock
can be applied to use the lockable storage feature on the large
customer storage bin.
2. The smaller compartment contains the jack kit. There is also extra
storage space for customer use. The lid on the small compartment is
accessible and secured by two snap features.
WARNING: This storage compartment is not designed to
restrain objects during a collision with the lid removed.
Passenger side cargo compartment
Your vehicle is equipped with a passenger side cargo compartment
located in the right rear trim panel which is used to store small items
and may have the Easy Fuel™ white plastic funnel attached on the
inside of the access door. Make sure the access door is secured so it
does not rattle when you drive.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
LUGGAGE RACK (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
roof rack. The maximum load for
the roof rack is 100 lb (45 kg),
evenly distributed on the cross-bars.
If it is not possible to evenly
distribute the load, position it in the
center or as far forward on the
cross-bars as possible.
Do not use the vehicle’s door
handles as tie down loops. Use
the tie-down loops on the
thumbwheels to secure load.
To adjust the cross-bar (if equipped) position:
1. Loosen the thumbwheel at both
ends of the cross-bar (both
cross-bars are adjustable).
2. Slide the cross-bar to the
desired location.
3. Tighten the thumbwheel at both
ends of the cross-bar.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
To remove the cross-bar assembly (if equipped) from the roof rack
side rails:
1. Loosen the thumbwheel at both
ends of the cross-bar (both
cross-bars are adjustable).
2. Slide the cross-bar to the end of
the rail.
3. Use a long, flat object to
depress the tongue in the
endcaps on both sides of the
cross-bar.
4. Slide the cross-bar assembly off
the end of the rail.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
To reinstall the cross-bar assembly (if equipped) to the roof rack
side rails:
1. Ensure that both cross-bar
assemblies are installed with the
F (front) arrow facing towards
the front of the vehicle.
2. Use a long, flat object to
depress the tongue in the
endcaps on both sides of the
cross-bar.
3. Slide the cross-bar assemblies
over the end cap tongue and
into the side rails.
4. Tighten thumbwheel at both
ends of the cross-bar.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
KEYS
Your vehicle is equipped with two
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
(IKTs). The IKT functions as both a
programmed ignition key that
operates all the locks and starts the
vehicle, and a remote keyless entry
transmitter.
Your IKTs are programmed to your vehicle; using a non-programmed key
will not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your authorized dealer
supplied IKTs, replacement IKTs are available through your authorized
dealer. Standard SecuriLock™ keys without remote entry transmitter
functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if
desired.
Always carry a spare key with you in case of an emergency.
For more information regarding programming replacement IKTs, refer to
the SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system section later in this chapter.
Note: Your vehicle’s IKTs were
issued with a security label on them
that provides important vehicle key
cut information. It is recommended
that you maintain the label in a safe
place for future reference, such as
the inside front cover of this
Owner’s Manual.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Recommended handling of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
(IKT)
To avoid inadvertently activating the remote entry functions of your
vehicle, it is recommended that the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
(IKT) be handled properly when starting and turning off your vehicle.
When inserting the IKT into the
ignition cylinder, place your thumb
on the center thumb rest of the IKT
and forefinger on the logo badge on
the opposite side.
To gain more leverage when rotating
the IKT in the ignition lock cylinder,
you can readjust the location of
your thumb to grasp the IKT on the
outer edge next to the
control.
Likewise, when rotating the IKT to
the off position in the ignition lock
cylinder, the bottom edge of the IKT
adjacent to the
utilized.
control can be
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
POWER DOOR LOCKS
• Press the
control to unlock all
doors.
• Press the
control to lock all
doors.
Door key unlocking/locking
Unlocking the doors
Turn the key in the door cylinder to unlock the driver’s door only. All
other doors will remain locked.
Locking the doors
Turn the key in the door cylinder to lock the driver’s door only.
Autolock
The autolock feature will lock all the doors, liftgate and liftgate window
when:
• all doors are closed,
• the ignition is in the on position,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
The autolock feature repeats when:
• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the on position
and the vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Deactivating/activating autolock
Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature enabled. There are two
methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer, or
• Performing the power door lock control procedure.
Note: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently
of the autounlock feature.
Before following the activation or deactivation procedures, make sure
that the anti-theft system is not armed, ignition is in the off position, and
all vehicle doors, liftgate and liftgate window are closed.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Power door unlock/lock procedure
You must complete Steps 1-5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, you must
wait 30 seconds.
Note: All doors must be closed and remain closed throughout the
configuration process.
1. The ignition must be off to
begin sequence.
2. Turn the ignition to the on
position.
3. Press the power door unlock
control three times.
4. Turn the ignition from the on to
the off position.
5. Press the power door unlock control three times.
6. Turn the ignition back to the on position. The horn will chirp.
7. Press the unlock control, then press the lock control. The horn will
chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short and one
long chirp) if autolock was activated.
8. Turn the ignition to the off position. The horn will chirp once to
confirm the procedure is complete.
Autounlock
The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:
• the ignition is in the on position, all the doors are closed, and the
vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h);
• the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the
off or accessory position; and
• the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being
transitioned to the off or accessory position.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been
electronically locked before the driver door is opened.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Deactivating/activating autounlock
Your vehicle comes with the autounlock feature activated. There are two
methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer, or
• by using the power door unlock/lock sequence.
Note: The autounlock feature can be activated/deactivated
independently of the autolock feature.
Power door lock switch autounlock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle
doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the
procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the on
position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the on
position to the off position.
4. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the on position. The horn will chirp one
time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. To enable/disable the autounlock feature, press the lock control, then
press the unlock control. The horn will chirp once if autounlock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autounlock
was activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the off position. The horn will chirp once to
confirm the procedure is complete.
Smart unlocking feature
The smart unlocking feature helps prevent you from locking yourself out
of the vehicle. With the key in any ignition position, the driver’s door will
automatically unlock if it is locked using the power lock control on the
driver’s door panel while the driver’s door is open.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear
doors cannot be opened from the
inside. The rear doors can be
opened from the outside when the
doors are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door.
NOTE: Setting the lock for one
door will not automatically set the
lock for both doors so you must set
each child lock on each door
separately.
Insert the key and turn in the direction of arrow shown on the door to
engage the child proof lock. Turn in the opposite direction to disengage
childproof locks.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) complies with part 15 of the
FCC rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your IKT is approximately 33 feet
(10 meters). A decrease in operating range could be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
• structures around the vehicle, or
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
The IKT allows you to:
• remotely unlock the vehicle
doors.
• remotely lock all the vehicle
doors.
• remotely open the power liftgate
glass.
• activate the personal alarm.
• operate the illuminated entry
feature.
The remote entry lock/unlock
feature operates in any ignition
position except while the key is held
in the start position. The panic
feature operates with the key in the off position.
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take
ALL Integrated Keyhead Transmitters with you to the authorized
dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.
Two step door unlocking
1. Press
and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
lamps will illuminate if the control on the overhead lamp is in the
DOOR position.
2. Press
and release again within three seconds to unlock the
passenger doors, the liftgate and liftgate glass.
One step door unlocking
If the one step door unlocking feature is activated, press
once to unlock all of the doors, the liftgate and liftgate glass. Note: The
interior lamps will illuminate (refer to the Illuminated entry feature
later in this section), if the control on the overhead lamp is in the DOOR
position.
and release
Switching from two step to one step door unlocking
Unlocking can be switched between two step and one step door
unlocking by pressing and holding both
and
buttons
simultaneously on the remote entry transmitter for approximately four
seconds. The turn signal will flash twice to indicate that the vehicle has
switched to one step unlocking. Repeat the procedure to switch back to
two step unlocking.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Locking the doors
1. Press
and release to lock all the doors. Assuming all vehicle doors
and the liftgate are properly closed, the park/turn lamps will flash
once.
2. Press
and release again within three seconds to confirm that all
the doors and liftgate are closed and locked. Note: The doors will
lock again and the horn will chirp once.
If any of the doors or the liftgate are not properly closed, the horn will
chirp twice and park/turn lamps will not flash when the
pressed.
control is
Opening the liftgate glass (if equipped)
Press
twice within three seconds to open the liftgate glass.
Car finder
Press
twice within three seconds. The horn will chirp and the turn
lamps will flash. It is recommended that this method be used to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
Sounding a panic alarm
Press
to activate the alarm. To deactivate the feature, press the
control again, turn the ignition to the 3 (ON) or 4 (START) position, or
wait for the alarm to time out in approximately three minutes.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the 1
(LOCK) position.
Replacing the battery
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter uses one coin type three-volt
lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of
the IKT near the key ring in
order to remove the battery
cover.
2. Do not wipe off any grease on
the battery terminals on the
back surface of the circuit
board.
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the instructions inside the IKT for
the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery down to
ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity.
5. Snap the battery cover back onto the key.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the IKT to become
deprogrammed from your vehicle. The IKT should operate normally after
battery replacement.
Replacing lost Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs)
If you would like to have your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
reprogrammed because you lost one, or would like to buy additional
IKTs, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all IKTs to your
authorized dealer for reprogramming.
How to reprogram your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs)
To program a new Integrated Keyhead Transmitter yourself, refer to
Programming spare keys in the SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft
section of this chapter. Note: At least two IKTs are required to perform
this procedure yourself.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps and puddle lamps (if equipped) illuminate when the
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter or the keyless entry system keypad is
used to unlock the door(s).
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
• the ignition is turned to the on position, or
• the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad (if equipped), or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
Perimeter lamps illuminated entry
With the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter system, the following items will
illuminate when the
• Head lamps
• Park lamps
(unlock) control on the transmitter is pressed:
• Tail lamps
The lamps will automatically turn off:
• if the ignition switch is turned to the on position, or
• the IKT
control is pressed, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
Note: On some vehicles, the perimeter lamps illuminated entry feature
will not activate in daylight conditions.
Deactivating/activating perimeter lamps illuminated entry
You may enable/disable this feature by having your vehicle serviced by
your authorized dealer.
You may also perform the following power door lock sequence to
enable/disable the perimeter lamps feature. Note: Before starting, ensure
the ignition is in the 1 (off) position and all vehicle doors are closed. You
must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have
to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait a minimum
of 30 seconds before beginning again.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
1. The ignition must be off to
begin the sequence.
2. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the 3 (on)
position.
3. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
4. Turn the ignition from the 3
(on) position to the 1 (off)
position.
5. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
6. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (on) position. The horn will chirp one
time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
7. Press the power door unlock control twice within five seconds.
Note: The horn will chirp once to indicate the perimeter lighting
feature has been deactivated. The horn will chirp once and honk
once (one short and one long) to indicate the perimeter lighting
feature has been activated.
8. Turn the ignition to the 1 (off) position to exit the procedure.
Note: The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is
complete.
Illuminated exit
• The interior lights will illuminate when the key is removed from the
ignition.
The lamps automatically turn off after 25 seconds. The dome and cargo
lamp controls must not be set to the off position for the illuminated exit
system to operate.
SECURILOCK™ PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)
programmed to your vehicle is used. The use of the wrong type of
coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Your vehicle comes with two coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitters;
additional coded IKTs may be purchased from your authorized dealer.
Standard SecuriLock™ keys without remote entry transmitter
functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if
desired. The authorized dealer can program your spare IKTs to your
vehicle or you can program the IKTs yourself. Refer to Programming
spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded key.
Note: The SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Mazda aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded IKT while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded IKT, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the IKT when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded IKT and restart the engine.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always
take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
Anti-theft indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument panel cluster.
• When the ignition is in the off
position, the indicator will flash
once every two seconds to
indicate the SecuriLock™ system
is functioning as a theft
deterrent.
• When the ignition is in the on position, the indicator will glow for
three seconds to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock™ system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the on position. If this
occurs, the vehicle will not start and should be taken to an authorized
dealer for service.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the off
position.
The theft indicator will flash every
two seconds to act as a theft
deterrent when the vehicle is
armed.
Automatic disarming
The vehicle is disarmed immediately after the ignition is turned to the on
position.
The theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out. If
the theft indicator stays on for an extended period of time or flashes
rapidly, have the system serviced by your authorized dealer.
Replacement Integrated Keyless Transmitters (IKT) and coded keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two Integrated Keyhead
Transmitters (IKTs). The IKT functions as both a programmed ignition
key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle, as well as a remote
keyless entry transmitter. A maximum of eight coded keys can be
programmed to your vehicle; only four of these eight keys can be IKTs
with remote entry functionality.
If your IKTs or standard SecuriLock™ coded keys are lost or stolen and
you don’t have an extra coded key, you will need to have your vehicle
towed to an authorized dealer. The key codes need to be erased from
your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Programming spare keys
You can program your own Integrated Keyhead Transmitters or standard
SecuriLock™ coded keys to your vehicle. This procedure will program
both the engine immobilizer keycode and the remote entry transmitter
portion of the IKT to your vehicle. Note: A maximum of eight coded
keys can be programmed to your vehicle; only four of these eight can be
IKTs with remote entry functionality.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Tips:
• Only use Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs) or standard
SecuriLock™ keys.
• You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that
already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed
key(s) readily accessible.
• If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key(s)
programmed.
Please read and understand the
entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously
programmed coded key into
the ignition.
2. Turn the ignition from the 1
(off) position to the 3 (on)
position. Keep the ignition in
the 3 (on) position for at least
three seconds, but no more than
10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition to the 1 (off) position and remove the first coded
key from the ignition.
4. Within 10 seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 (off) position,
insert the second previously coded key into the ignition.
5. Turn the ignition from the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on) position.
Keep the ignition in the 3 (on) position for at least three seconds,
but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition to the 1 (off) position and remove the second
previously programmed coded key from the ignition.
7. Within 20 seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 (off) position and
removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition.
8. Turn the ignition from the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on) position.
Keep the ignition in the 3 (on) position for at least six seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s
engine and will operate the remote entry system (if the new key is an
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter). The theft indicator light will illuminate
for three seconds and then go out to indicate successful programming.
If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start your
vehicle’s engine and/or will not operate the remote entry features. The
theft indicator light may flash on and off. Wait 20 seconds and you may
repeat Steps 1 through 8. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your
authorized dealer to have the new key(s) programmed.
To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), wait 20 seconds and
then repeat this procedure from Step 1.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
SEATING
Adjustable head restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard head restraints that are
vertically adjustable.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in
and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its
proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint
while the vehicle is in motion.
The adjustable head restraints
consist of :
• a trimmed energy absorbing foam
and structure (1),
• two steel stems (2),
• a guide sleeve adjust/release
button (3),
• and a guide sleeve unlock/remove
button (4).
To adjust the head restraint, do the following:
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving/riding position.
2. Raise the head restraint by
pulling up on the head restraint.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. Lower the head restraint by
pressing and holding the guide
sleeve adjust/release button and
pushing down on the head
restraint.
Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the
head restraint to its full up position.
WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted
when the seat is occupied.
To remove the adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Pull up the head restraint until
it reaches the highest
adjustment position.
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
2. Simultaneously press and hold
both the adjust/release button
and the unlock/remove button,
then pull up on the head
restraint.
To reinstall the adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Insert the two stems into the
guide sleeve collars.
2. Push the head restraint down
until it locks.
Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the
head restraint to its full up position.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, head restraints must be installed properly.
Adjusting the front manual seat
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving. Sudden braking or a collision could cause
serious injury. Adjust the seat only when the vehicle is stopped.
WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to
reduce the risk of injuring people in a collision or sudden stop.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Not securing luggage or cargo while driving is
dangerous as it could move or be crushed during sudden braking
or a collision and cause injury. Make sure luggage and cargo are
secured before driving.
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips and the shoulder
belt snug across the chest.
WARNING: Sitting in a reclined position while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous because you don’t get the full protection
from seat belts. During sudden braking or a collision, you can slide
under the lap belt and suffer serious internal injury, or in a rear end
collision you could fly up and out of the vehicle. For maximum
protection, sit well back and upright.
Lift handle to move seat forward or
backward.
Pull lever up to adjust seatback.
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Using the manual lumbar support (if equipped)
The lumbar support control is
located on the inboard side of the
driver’s seatback.
Turn the lumbar support control
clockwise to increase firmness.
Turn the lumbar support control
counterclockwise to increase
softness.
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving. You could move out of position to control the
vehicle. Then a serious accident could occur. Sudden braking or a
collision could cause serious injury. Adjust the seat only when the
vehicle is stopped.
WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to
reduce the risk of injuring people in a collision or sudden stop.
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips and the shoulder
belt snug across the chest.
WARNING: Sitting in a reclined position while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous because you don’t get the full protection
from seat belts. During sudden braking or a collision, you can slide
under the lap belt and suffer serious internal injury, or in a rear end
collision you could fly up and out of the vehicle. For maximum
protection, sit well back and upright.
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your
seatback, with your feet on the floor.
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury: Do not
hang objects off seat back or stow objects in the seatback map
pocket (if equipped) when a child is in the front passenger seat. Do
not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the
seat and the center console (if equipped). Check the “passenger airbag
off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp for proper airbag status. Refer
to Front passenger sensing system section for additional
details. Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with
the front passenger seat sensing system.
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Move the front of the control up or
down to raise or lower the front
portion of the seat cushion.
Move the rear of the control up or
down to raise or lower the rear
portion of the seat cushion.
Move the control in the directions
shown to move the seat forward,
backward, up or down.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Heated seats (if equipped)
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
To operate the heated seats:
• Push the button located on the
instrument panel to activate.
• Push again to deactivate.
The heated seats will activate when the ignition is in the on position and
the engine is running.
REAR SEATS
Head restraints (if equipped)
The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the
event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head restraints, lift the
head restraint so that it is located directly behind your head or as close
to that position as possible.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The head restraints can be moved
up and down.
Push control to lower head restraint.
Folding down rear seats (60/40 split bench)
1. Raise the rear seat head
restraint and remove.
2. Place the head restraint under
the front seat for storage.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. Pull the seat release control.
NOTE: Make sure the floor is clear of all objects before folding the seat.
4. Flip seat forward.
Attach the seat belt web snap
button to the quarter trim panel
snap button. This will assure that
seatbelt does not get caught by
staying out of the seat back folding
path.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
5. To release seatback, pull the
seatback release lever (on top
of seat) toward the front seat.
NOTE: When the seatback release
lever is pulled, slowly lower
seatback to the flat position.
6. Rotate seatback down into load
floor position.
Returning the rear seats to upright position
1. Pull seatback up and into
upright position making sure
seatback locks into place.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
2. Rotate seat cushion down into
the seating position making sure
that the seat cushion is locked
into place and the RED seat
unlatched indicator on release
paddle is not visible.
WARNING: Make sure seat
belt buckle heads are
through elastic holders on seat
backs. Seat belt buckle heads may
break if they are trapped
underneath the seatback as the
seatback is rotated down.
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
underneath the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original
position, pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or
collision.
3. Remove the head restraints
stored under the front
passenger seat and return them
to the original position on the
seat backs.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
To remove the rear cushion
1. Lift the yellow tab to release the
hinges.
2. Pull the cushion to the outboard
side of the vehicle.
To install the rear cushion
1. Insert rod ends into floor
mounting points and push the
cushion to the inboard side of
the vehicle.
2. Make sure that the hinges are
locked into place.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety Systemா
The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of
frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help
further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating
the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of
occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front seat belts with pretensioners (front row only), load limiter
(front row only), and seat belt usage sensors (front row only).
• Front passenger sensing system
• “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Front crash severity sensor.
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), seat belt
pretensioners, front seat belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, front passenger sensing system, and indicator lights.
How does the Personal Safety Systemா work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the Restraints control module (RCM). During a crash, the
RCM may activate the seat belt pretensioners and/or either one or both
stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System determined
the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags and
pretensioners are designed to activate only in frontal and near-frontal
collisions, not rollovers, side-impacts, or rear-impacts unless the collision
causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage airbags inflation energy is tailored to crash severity, belt
use, driver seat position, and other factors. A lower, less forceful energy
level is provided for more common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher
energy level is used for the most severe impacts unless the driver’s seat
is forward for a small occupant. Refer to Airbag supplemental
restraints section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Personal Safety System to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage airbags and seat belt pretensioners.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.
Front passenger sensing system
For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close
to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, like infants
in rear-facing child seats, this occurs because they are initially sitting
very close to the airbag. For other occupants, this occurs when the
occupant is not properly restrained by seat belts or child safety seats and
they move forward during pre-crash braking. The most effective way to
reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants are
properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are much
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the
front.
WARNING: Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air
bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the
passenger front airbag. The system is designed to help protect small
(child size) occupants from airbag deployments when they are
improperly seated or restrained in the front passenger seat contrary to
proper child-seating or restraint usage recommendations. Even with this
technology, parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly
restrain children in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the passenger
front airbag and passenger seat-mounted side airbag (if equipped) when
the passenger seat is empty.
When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the “pass airbag off” indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal
airbag is off. See Front passenger sensing system in the airbags section
of this chapter.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Front seat belt usage sensors
The front seat belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger seat belts are fastened. This information allows
your Personal Safety System to tailor the airbag deployment and seat
belt pretensioner activation depending upon seat belt usage. Refer to
Safety restraints section in this chapter.
Front seat belt pretensioners
The seat belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the seat belts firmly against the occupant’s body
during frontal collisions, and in side collisions and rollovers when the
vehicle is equipped with the side-curtain airbag system. This helps
increase the effectiveness of the seat belts. In frontal collisions, the seat
belt pretensioners can be activated alone or, if the collision is of
sufficient severity, together with the front airbags.
Seat belt load limiter
The front and rear outboard seat belt load limiter allows webbing to be
pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled manner in
response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps reduce the
risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by limiting the load
on the occupant. Refer to Load limiter feature section in this chapter.
Determining if the Personal Safety Systemா is operational
The Personal Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning light section in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine
maintenance of the Personal Safety System is not required.
The Restraints control module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
seat belt pretensioners, front seat belt buckle sensors, driver seat
position sensor, and front passenger sensing system. In addition, the
RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster.
A malfunction with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following.
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal
Safety System serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Safety restraints precautions
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips and the shoulder
belt snug across the chest.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
where they can be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their seat belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die or be seriously injured than a
person wearing a seat belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
seat belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the seat belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Placing a child, 12 years or younger, in the front
seat is dangerous. The child could be hit by a deploying airbag
and be seriously injured or even killed. A sleeping child is more likely
to lean against the door and be hit by the side airbag (if equipped) in a
moderate collision. Whenever possible, always secure a child, 12 years
or younger, in the rear seat, with an appropriate child restraint system
for the child’s age and size. Never use a rear-facing child restraint
system in the front seat with an airbag that could deploy.
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
women, should wear seat belts for optimum protection in an
accident.
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle
closest to the direction the
tongue is coming from) until
you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, push the release
button and remove the tongue
from the buckle.
Load Limiter Feature
• This vehicle has a seat belt system with a load limiter feature at the
front and rear outboard seating positions to help further reduce the
risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
• This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to pay
out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help
reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.
All seat belts in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. The
passenger seat belts have two types of locking modes described below:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination seat belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Automatic locking mode for use with child safety seats
When to use the automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver seat belt.
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a
booster, is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions. Children
12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints for children or
Safety seats for children later in this chapter.
How to use the automatic locking mode for use with child safety
seats
• Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.
• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
If the seat belt is not coming out of the retractor when it looks to be
fully retracted, check to see if it might still be attached to the side of the
vehicle by the snaps designed to keep it out of the way when you last
put the rear seat into cargo configuration. Refer to Returning the rear
seats to upright position in this chapter.
WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the seat belt systems at
all seating positions (except the driver position, which doesn’t
have this feature) must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify
that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still
functioning properly. In addition, all seat belts should be checked for
proper function.
WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE
REPLACED if the seat belt assembly “automatic locking
retractor” feature or any other seat belt function is not operating
properly when checked according to the procedures in Workshop
Manual. Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Seat belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has seat belt height
adjustments at the front outboard
seating positions. Adjust the height
of the shoulder belt so the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
squeeze and hold the buttons on the
side and slide the height adjuster up
or down. Release the buttons and
pull down on the height adjuster to
make sure it is locked in place.
WARNING: Position the seat belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the seat belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt
and increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Seat belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with seat belt pretensioners at the driver and
right front passenger seating positions.
The seat belt pretensioner removes some slack from the seat belt system
at the start of a crash. The seat belt pretensioner uses the same crash
sensor system as the front airbags and side-curtain airbags (if equipped).
When the seat belt pretensioner deploys, the lap and shoulder belt are
tightened.
When the side-curtain airbags (if equipped) and/or the front airbags are
activated, the seat belt pretensioners for the driver and right front
passenger seating positions will be activated when the respective seatbelt
is properly buckled.
WARNING: The driver and the right front passenger seat belt
system (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must
be replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in
deployment of front airbags, seat-mounted side airbags, or side-curtain
airbags (if equipped) and seat belt pretensioners.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Failure to replace both front restraints under the
above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision. The seat belt pretensioners will only function once.
After they are deployed, they will not work again and must be replaced
immediately, even if there was no front seat occupant seated at the
time.
WARNING: Modifying the components or wiring of the
pretensioner system, including the use of electronic testing
devices is dangerous. You could accidentally activate it or make it
inoperable which would prevent it from activating in an accident. Front
occupants could be seriously injured. Never modify the components or
wiring, or use electronic testing devices on the pretensioner system.
WARNING: Improper disposal of the pretensioner system or a
vehicle with non-deactivated pretensioners is dangerous. Unless
all safety procedures are followed, injury could result. Ask an
authorized Mazda dealer how to safely dispose of the pretensioner
system or how to scrap a front pretensioner-equipped vehicle.
Refer to the Seat belt maintenance section in this chapter.
Seat belt extension assembly
If the seat belt is too short when fully extended, a 9 inch (23 cm) or
12 inch (31 cm) seat belt extension assembly can be added (part
numbers 611C22–A and 611C22–B respectively). Seat belt extension
assemblies can be obtained from your authorized Mazda dealership.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the seat belt.
Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the
label. Also, use the seat belt extension only if the seat belt is too short
for you when fully extended.
When you are not using the extensions store them in another location so
that no one will accidentally use them.
NOTE: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt
across the torso.
Seat belt warning light and indicator chime
The seat belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their seat belts.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Conditions of operation
If...
Then...
The driver’s seat belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The seat belt warning light illuminates
1-2 minutes and the warning chime
sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver’s seat belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The driver’s seat belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The seat belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The seat belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
Belt-Minderா
The Belt-Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the seat belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the seat belt warning
lamp in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt is unbuckled.
The Belt-Minder feature uses information from the front passenger
sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the
Belt-Minder feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined
by the front passenger sensing system.
Both the driver’s and passenger’s seat belt usages are monitored and
either may activate the Belt-Minder feature. The warnings are the same
for the driver and the front passenger. If the Belt-Minder warnings have
expired (warnings for approximately 5 minutes) for one occupant (driver
or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the
Belt-Minder feature.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
If...
Then...
The driver’s and front
The Belt-Minder feature will not
passenger’s seat belts are
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position or less than
activate.
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been
turned to on...
The driver’s or front
The Belt-Minder feature is activated
- the seat belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for 6 seconds every
passenger’s seat belt is not
buckled when the vehicle has
reached at least 3 mph
(5 km/h) and 1-2 minutes have 30 seconds, repeating for
elapsed since the ignition
approximately 5 minutes or until the
switch has been turned to on... seat belts are buckled.
The driver’s or front
The Belt-Minder feature is activated
passenger’s seat belt becomes - the seat belt warning light
unbuckled for approximately
1 minute while the vehicle is
traveling at least 3 mph
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for 6 seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for
(5 km/h) and more than
approximately 5 minutes or until the
1-2 minutes have elapsed since seat belts are buckled.
the ignition switch has been
turned to on...
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing seat belts
(All statistics based on U.S. data):
Reasons given...
Consider...
ЉCrashes are rare eventsЉ
36,700 crashes occur every day.
The more we drive, the more we are
exposed to ЉrareЉ events, even for
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
ЉI’m not going farЉ
3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25
miles of home.
ЉBelts are uncomfortableЉ
Seat belts are designed to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable -
try different positions for the seat belt
upper anchorage and seatback which
should be as upright as possible; this
can improve comfort.
ЉI was in a hurryЉ
Prime time for an accident. Seat
Belt Warning Chime reminds us to
take a few seconds to buckle up.
Seat belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
ЉSeat belts don’t workЉ
ЉTraffic is lightЉ
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
ЉBelts wrinkle my clothesЉ
ЉThe people I’m with don’t
wear beltsЉ
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Reasons given...
Consider...
ЉI have an airbagЉ
Airbags offer greater protection when
used with seat belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
ЉI’d rather be thrown clearЉ
Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely
to DIE. Seat belts help prevent
ejection, WE CAN’T ЉPICK OUR
CRASHЉ.
WARNING: Do not sit on top of a buckled seat belt or insert a
latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt-Minder chime. To
do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s air bag
system and result in serious injury, ejection and death.
One-time disable
If at any time the driver/front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles
the seat belt for that seating position, the Belt-Minder is disabled for
the current ignition cycle. The Belt-Minder feature will enable during
the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled for
approximately 30 seconds. Confirmation is not given for the one time
disable.
Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minderா feature
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder are
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder features can be
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set
• The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)
• The gearshift is in N (Neutral) (manual transmission)
• The ignition switch is in the off position
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
• The driver and front passenger seat belts are unbuckled
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your
Belt-Minder, this system is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you
leave the Belt-Minder system activated for yourself and others who
may use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not
deactivate/activate the Belt-Minder feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the on position. DO NOT START THE
ENGINE.
2. Wait until the seat belt warning light turns off (Approximately one
minute).
• Step 3 must be completed within 30 seconds after the seat belt
warning light turns off.
3. For the seating position being disabled, buckle then unbuckle the
seat belt three times, ending in the unbuckled state.
• After Step 3, the seat belt warning light will be turned on for three
seconds.
4. Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle
then unbuckle the seat belt.
• This will disable the Belt-Minder feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the seat belt warning light will
flash four times per second for three seconds.
• This will enable the Belt-Minder feature for that seating position if it
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the seat belt warning light will
flash four times per second for three seconds, followed by three
seconds with the light off, then followed by the seat belt warning light
flashing four times per second for three seconds again.
• After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is
complete.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
4X4
Important supplemental restraint system (SRS) precautions
The supplemental restraint system
is designed to work with the seat
belt to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain
upper body injuries.
WARNING: Airbags DO
NOT inflate slowly or gently
and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is greatest close
to the trim covering the airbag
module.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their seat belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNING: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches
(25 cm) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: The driver should always hold onto only the rim of
the steering wheel. Never place your arm over the airbag module
or anywhere inside the rim as a deploying airbag can result in serious
arm fractures or other injuries.
Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two notches) from the upright
position.
WARNING: Do not put anything on or over the airbag module
including hands or feet. Placing objects on or over the airbag
inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the airbag
into your face and torso causing serious injury.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
Airbag Supplemental Restraint Systems or its fuses. See your
authorized Mazda dealership.
WARNING: Modifications to the front end of the vehicle,
including frame, bumper, front end body structure, tow hooks,
and snow plows may affect the performance of the airbag sensors
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the
vehicle.
WARNING: Additional equipment may affect the performance of
the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury. Consult your
authorized Mazda dealership before installation of additional
equipment.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and airbags
For additional important safety
information, read all information on
safety restraints in this guide.
WARNING: Children must
always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer
when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions rather than
in the front seating position.
Failure to follow these instructions
may increase the risk of injury in
a collision.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back. Secure the seat and the child in it properly.
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?
The airbag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
longitudinal deceleration sufficient
to cause the sensors to close an
electrical circuit that initiates airbag
inflation.
The fact that the airbags did not
inflate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces
were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. Airbags are designed to inflate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or rear-impacts unless
the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder or sodium compounds which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the SRS is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with
a deploying airbag may also cause
abrasions, swelling or temporary
hearing loss. Because airbags must
inflate rapidly and with considerable
force, there is the risk of death or
serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal
injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are
otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment. It is
extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away
from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control.
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation or you may be
burned.
WARNING: If the airbag and seat belt pretensioners have
deployed, the airbag or seat belt pretensioners will not function
again and must be replaced immediately. If the airbag or seat belt
pretensioners are not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
The SRS consists of:
• driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and
airbags),
• seat-mounted side airbags (if equipped). Refer to Seat-mounted
Seat-mounted side airbag system later in this chapter
• one or more impact and safing sensors,
• a readiness light and tone
• diagnostic module
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
• and the electrical wiring which connects the components.
• Side curtain airbag system. Refer to Side curtain airbag system later
in this chapter.
• Front passenger sensing system. Refer to Front passenger sensing
system later in this chapter.
• “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp. Refer to
Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter.
• Seat belt pretensioners
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the
supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the impact
sensors), the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the airbag
back up power and the airbag ignitors.
Front passenger sensing system
The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208
and is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger’s frontal
airbag under certain conditions.
The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of
the front passenger’s seat and seat belt. The sensors are designed to
detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the
front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or
disabled (will not inflate).
The front passenger sensing system will disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in
the front seat,
• the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant
seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing
child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat,
• a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of
time,
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
For side airbag equipped vehicles, the front passenger sensing system
will turn off the passenger seat side airbag if:
• the seat is empty and seat belt is unbuckled.
The front passenger sensing system
uses a Љpassenger airbag offЉ or
Љpass airbag offЉ indicator which will
illuminate and stay lit to remind you
that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled. The indicator lamp is
located in the center stack of the instrument panel just above the air
vents.
Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when
the ignition is turned to the on position to confirm it is functional.
When the front passenger seat is not occupied (empty seat) or in the
event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate), the
indicator lamp will be unlit.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not
inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant
seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected.
• When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate)
the front passenger frontal airbag, the indicator lamp will illuminate
and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is
disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not
lit, then turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the
vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
Љpassenger airbag offЉ or Љpass airbag offЉ indicator lamp is lit, it is
possible that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the
full upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.
• If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, the person should be
advised to ride in the rear seat, and the system should be taken
promptly to an authorized Mazda dealer for repair before that seat is
occupied again.
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Lamp
Occupant
Passenger Airbag
Empty seat
Unlit
Lit
Disabled
Disabled
Small child in child
safety seat or booster
Small child with seat
belt buckled or
unbuckled
Lit
Disabled
Enabled
Adult
Unlit
WARNING: Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children
12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on seat belts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting
in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the
passenger airbag is disabled, the Љpass airbag offЉ lamp may or may not
be illuminated according to the table below.
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Lamp
Objects
Passenger Airbag
Small (i.e. three-ring binder, Unlit
small purse, bottled water)
Disabled
Medium (i.e. heavy
briefcase, fully packed
luggage)
Empty seat, or small to
medium object with seat
belt buckled
Lit
Disabled
Disabled
Lit
If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is
incorrect, check for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat
• Objects between the seat cushion and the center console (if
equipped)
• Objects hanging off the seat back
• Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket (if equipped)
• Objects placed on the occupant’s lap
• Cargo interference with the seat
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat
The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated
occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing
system. The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or
lighter due to the conditions described in the list above.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury:
Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket (if equipped) or
hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat.
Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between
the seat and the center console (if equipped).
Check Passenger Airbag Disable Indicator for proper airbag Status.
Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front
passenger seat sensing system.
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
In case there is a problem with the
front passenger sensing system, the
airbag readiness lamp in the
instrument cluster will stay lit.
If the airbag readiness lamp is lit, do the following:
The driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects that
may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering
with the seat.
If objects are lodged and/or cargo is interfering with the seat; please take
the following steps to remove the obstruction:
• Pull the vehicle over.
• Turn the vehicle off.
• Driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
• Restart the vehicle.
• Wait at least 2 minutes and verify that the airbag readiness lamp is no
longer illuminated
• If the airbag readiness lamp remains illuminated, this may or may/not
be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system.
DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to an authorized Mazda dealer. Ask the front seat occupant
to sit in a rear seat until the air bag system if checked by the authorized
Mazda Dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Mazda Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance section of this Owner’s Manual.
WARNING: Any alteration/modification to the front passenger
seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing
system.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness
section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
A malfunction with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following:
• The readiness light will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beep sounds will be heard. The tone pattern will
repeat periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your authorized Mazda dealership immediately.
WARNING: Unless serviced, the system may not function
properly in the event of a collision.
Seat-mounted side airbag system (if equipped)
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or
near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front
seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers or non-Mazda
leather seat upgrade kits. The use of accessory seat covers and
kits may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the
risk of injury in an accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag
could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag SRS, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag. See an authorized dealer.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle should always wear
their seat belts even when an airbag SRS is provided.
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the side airbag system (if equipped) work?
The design and development of the
side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags.
The side airbag system consists of
the following:
• An inflatable nylon bag (airbag)
with a gas generator concealed
behind the outboard bolster of
the driver and front passenger
seatbacks.
• A special seat cover designed to allow airbag deployment.
• The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used
for the front airbags.
• Two crash sensors located on the lower portion of the b-pillar (one on
each side of the vehicle).
Side airbags, in combination with seat belts, can help reduce the risk of
severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by
the collision will be inflated. If the front passenger sensing system
detects an empty seat, the front passenger seat-mounted side airbag will
be deactivated. The airbag was designed to inflate between the door
panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact collisions.
The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit
that initiates airbag inflation.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were
not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side airbags are designed
to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or
near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral
deceleration.
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the side
airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The
side airbag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and
serviced by an authorized dealer.
If the airbag is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Determining if the side airbags are operational
First determine you have the optional side airbags - locate the “AIRBAGЉ
labels on the outboard sides of the front seats.
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness
section in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
side airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light (same light as for front airbag system) will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not
function properly in the event of a collision.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Side-curtain airbag system (if equipped)
You can easily confirm if your vehicle has side-curtain airbags by looking
inside the vehicle up at the upper ЉBЉ pillar where you will see an
embossed ЉAIRBAGЉ label.
WARNING: Do not place
objects or mount equipment
on or near the headliner at the
siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying
side-curtain airbags (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions
may increase the risk of personal
injury in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door or window glass.
The side-curtain airbags (if equipped) could injure you as it
deploys from the headliner.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
side-curtain airbags (if equipped), fuses, the A, B, or C pillar
trim, or the headliner on a vehicle containing side-curtain airbags. See
your authorized Mazda dealer.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle including the driver
should always wear their seat belts even when an airbag SRS and
side-curtain airbags (if equipped) are provided.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place
objects in the deployment path of the inflatable side-curtain
airbags (if equipped).
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
How do the side-curtain airbags (if equipped) work?
The design and development of the
side air curtain system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags (including side air
curtain systems).
The side-curtain airbags (if
equipped) consists of the following:
• An inflatable nylon curtain with a
gas generator concealed behind
the headliner and above the doors
(one on each side of vehicle).
• A headliner designed to flex open
above the side doors to allow side-curtain airbag deployment.
• The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used
for the front airbags.
• Two crash sensors mounted at lower B-Pillar (one on each side).
• Two crash sensors located at the c-pillar behind the rear doors (one
on each side).
• Rollover sensor in the restraints control module (RCM).
The side-curtain airbags (if equipped), in combination with seat belts,
can help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant
side impact collision or rollover event.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
the rear seats. The side-curtain airbags (if equipped) will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat
because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
The side-curtain airbags (if equipped) are designed to activate when the
vehicle sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the RCM to
initiate side-curtain airbag (if equipped) inflation or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor.
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The side-curtain airbags are mounted to roof side-rail sheet metal,
behind the headliner, above the first and second row seats. In certain
lateral collisions or rollover events, the side-curtain airbags will be
activated, regardless of which seats are occupied. In certain rollover
events, the side-curtain airbag (if equipped) on both sides of the vehicle
will be inflated, regardless of which seats are occupied. The side-curtain
airbags (if equipped) are designed to inflate between the side window
area and occupants to further enhance protection provided in side
impact collisions and rollover events.
The fact that the side-curtain airbags (if equipped) did not activate in a
collision does not mean that there is a malfunction with the system.
Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause
activation. The side-curtain airbags (if equipped) are designed to inflate
in certain side impact collisions or rollover events, not in rear impact,
frontal or near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient
lateral deceleration or rollover likelihood.
WARNING: Several
side-curtain airbag (if
equipped) components get hot
after inflation. Do not touch them
after inflation.
WARNING: If the side-curtain airbags (if equipped) have
deployed, the side-curtain airbags will not function again unless
replaced. The side-curtain airbags (including the A, B and C pillar
trim) must be inspected and serviced by a authorized dealer in
accordance with the vehicle workshop manual. If the side-curtain
airbags are not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Determining if the side-curtain airbags are operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness
section in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light (same light as for front airbag system) will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beep sounds will be heard. The tone pattern will
repeat periodically until the problem and light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your authorized Mazda dealership immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the event of a collision.
S.O.S. Post Crash Alert
The S.O.S Post Crash Alert automatically flashes the turn signal lamps
and sounds the horn three times at four second intervals in the event of
a serious impact that deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain or
Safety Canopy) or the seat belt pretensioners.
The S.O.S. Post Crash Alert can be turned off when any one of the
following actions are taken by the driver or any other person:
• pressing the hazard control button,
• or pressing the panic button on the remote key fob.
The feature will continue to operate until the vehicle runs out of power.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles
For disposal of seat belt pretensioners, airbags, or airbag equipped
vehicles, see your authorized Mazda dealership. Airbags MUST BE
disposed of by qualified personnel.
WARNING: Disposing of an airbag can be dangerous. Unless all
safety procedures are followed, injury can result. Ask an
Authorized Mazda dealer how to safely dispose of an airbag or how to
scrap an airbag equipped vehicle.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in
a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight.
Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The
Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety
organizations or are the minimum requirements of law. Mazda
recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) and your pediatrician to make sure your child seat
is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and properly
installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST
contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the internet at
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. Failure to properly restrain children in safety
seats made especially for their height, age, and weight may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended
Child size, height, weight, or age
restraint type
Infants Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
Use a child safety
seat (sometimes
called an infant
carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler
seat).
or
(generally age four or younger)
toddlers
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended
Child size, height, weight, or age
restraint type
Small
Children who have outgrown or no longer Use a
children properly fit in a child safety seat
belt-positioning
booster seat.
(generally children who are less than
4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, are
greater than age four (4) and less than
age twelve (12), and between 40 lbs
(18 kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg) and upward to
100 lbs (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer)
Larger Children who have outgrown or no longer Use a vehicle seat
children properly fit in a belt-positioning booster belt having the lap
seat (generally children who are at least belt snug and low
4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall or
greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by child
restraint manufacturer)
across the hips,
shoulder belt
centered across
the shoulder and
chest, and
seatback upright.
• You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 ft 9 in
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of
age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated
below by “X”
LATCH LATCH Seat
(lower (lower belt
anchors anchors and
Seat belt
and LATCH belt
(lower
anchors
Seat
Restraint
Type
Child
Weight
only
and top only)
tether
top
tether and top
anchor tether
anchor)
anchor)
Rear facing Up to
child seat
48 lb
X
X
(21 kg)
Forward
Up to
facing child 48 lb
X
X
X
X
X
seat
(21 kg)
Forward
Over
facing child 48 lb
seat (21 kg)
WARNING: Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air
bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move
the vehicle seat all the way back. When possible, all children age 12
and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If
all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating
position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat.
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and
warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child’s height, age, or weight or does not
properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death.
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision, which may result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.
They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a collision.
WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster
seat. These objects may become projectiles in a collision or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
Transporting children
Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their age, height and weight. All children are shaped
differently. The child height, age and weight thresholds provided are
recommendations or the minimum requirements of law. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) provides education and
training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in
the correct restraint system. Mazda recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and your
pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and
CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the internet
at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov.
Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult
passengers in your vehicle.
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
If the child is the proper height, age, and weight (as specified by your
child safety seat or booster manufacturer), fits the restraint and can be
restrained properly, then restrain the child in the child safety seat or
with the belt-positioning booster. Remember that child seats and
belt-positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of
different heights, ages and weights. Children who are too large for child
safety seats or belt-positioning boosters (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always properly wear seat belts.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Infant and/or toddler seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Airbag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
• Carefully follow all of the
manufacturer’s instructions
included with the safety seat you
put in your vehicle. If you do not
install and use the safety seat
properly, the child may be injured
in a sudden stop or collision.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the vehicle seat all the
way back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
The rear seat head restraints must be removed when using a child
seat that utilizes the top tether anchor.
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap/shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seat belt buckle for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap
and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place vehicle seat back in upright position.
• Put the seat belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to step 5 below.
Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with
combination lap/shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
1. Position the child safety seat in
a seat with a combination lap
and shoulder belt.
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder
belt and lap belt together.
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route
the tongue through the child
seat according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be
sure the belt webbing is not
twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle
closest to the direction the
tongue is coming from) for that
seating position until you hear a
snap and feel the latch engage.
Make sure the tongue is latched
securely by pulling on it.
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp
the shoulder portion of the belt
and pull downward until all of
the belt is pulled out.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it
retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more
belt out). If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.
8. Remove remaining slack from
the belt. Force the seat down
with extra weight, e.g., by
pressing down or kneeling on
the child restraint while pulling
up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt.
This is necessary to remove the
remaining slack that will exist
once the additional weight of
the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child
seat to the vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean towards the buckle will
additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the
child seat is equipped). Refer to
Attaching child safety seats
with tether straps later in this
chapter.
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
10. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to
side and forward and back. There should be no more than one inch
(2.5 cm) of movement for proper installation.
11. Mazda recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed.
Attaching child safety seats with LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) attachments for child
seat anchors
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two (2)
lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet
(called the “seat bight”) and one (1) top tether anchor located behind
that seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH
equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment
method eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the child seat,
however the seat belt can still be used to attach the child seat. For
forward-facing child seats, the top tether strap must also be attached to
the proper top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has been provided
with your child seat. Mazda Motor Corporation recommends the use of a
child safety seat having a top tether strap. See Attaching child safety
seats with tether straps and Recommendations for attaching safety
restraints for children in this chapter for more information.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the
seating positions marked with the child seat symbol.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The LATCH anchors are located at
the rear section of the rear seat
between the cushion and seat back.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install a
child seat with LATCH attachments.
Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps.
Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this
chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors
shown.
WARNING: Never attach two child safety seats to the same
anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious
injury or death.
Use of inboard lower anchors from the outboard seating positions
(center seating use)
The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced
400 mm (16 inches) apart. The standardized spacing for LATCH lower
anchors is 280 mm (11 inches) center to center. A child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position.
LATCH compatible child seats (with attachments on belt webbing) can
only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is
attached to that anchor.
WARNING: The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors
is 280 mm (11 inches) center to center. Do not use LATCH
lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at
least as far apart as those of this vehicle.
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, and have
attached the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor, do not
tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat
cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just
touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the
child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to
the vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a crash greatly increases.
Combining seat belt and LATCH lower anchors for attaching child
safety seats
When used in combination, either the seat belt or the LATCH lower
anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved.
Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat. Refer
to Recommendations for attaching safety restraints for children in
this chapter.
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring
point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your
child seat for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a
longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach
the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle.
The rear seating positions of your vehicle are equipped with built-in
tether strap anchors located behind the seats on the roof panel in the
cargo area.
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
Attach the tether strap only to the
appropriate tether anchor as shown.
The tether strap may not work
properly if attached somewhere
other than the correct tether
anchor.
Once the child safety seat has been
installed, using either the seat belt
or the lower anchors of the LATCH system, you can attach the top tether
strap.
Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether
anchors:
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, remove the head restraint
first, place under the front seat for storage, and then route the tether
strap over the top of the seatback.
2. Locate the correct anchor for
the selected seating position.
There are three tether anchors
located on the headliner at the rear
of the vehicle.
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor as shown.
The arrow in the above graphic
points toward the front of the
vehicle.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety seat may
not be retained properly in the
event of a collision.
4. Tighten the child safety seat
tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision greatly increases.
Child booster seats
The belt-positioning booster (booster seat) is used to improve the fit of
the vehicle seat belt. Children outgrow a typical child seat (e.g,
convertible or toddler seat) when they weigh about 40 lb (18 kg) and are
around four (4) years of age. Consult your child safety seat owner
manual for the weight, height, and age limits specific to your child safety
seat. Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child,
remains appropriate for their weight, height and age AND if properly
secured to the vehicle.
Although the lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, children
who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap/shoulder
belts to fit properly, and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle seat belt
could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash. To improve the fit of
both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child
safety seats, Mazda Motor Corporation recommends use of a
belt-positioning booster.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap/shoulder seat belts fit
better. They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips
and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion, while
minimizing slouching. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit
better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the
shoulder and across the center of the chest. Moving the child closer (a
few centimeters or inches) to the center of the vehicle, but remaining in
the same seating position, may help provide a good shoulder belt fit.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they reach a
height of at least 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall (around age eight to
age twelve and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) or upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when seated without a booster seat:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Types of booster seats
There are generally two types of belt-positioning booster seats: backless
and high back. Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle
lap/shoulder belt.
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield. If a vehicle seating position
has a low seat back or no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (as
measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this
case, move the backless booster
to another seating position with a
higher seat back or head restraint and lap/shoulder belts, or consider
using a high back booster seat.
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that
keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the
stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and
rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings below compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck
and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings below
also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child’s
hips.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster
seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is generally best to use a
booster seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat.
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not
stay positioned on the shoulder during use.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
Child restraint and seat belt maintenance
Inspect the seat belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged.
NOTE: If unsure about the proper procedures, bring your vehicle to an
authorized Mazda dealership for inspection. Inspect the seat belts to
make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts, replacing if necessary. Check
all emergency locking retractors on all outboard seating positions as well
as the automatic locking mode for child safety seats on all seats except
the driver’s seat. All seat belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles,
front seat belt buckle assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if
equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt
guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety seat tether bracket
assemblies (if equipped), LATCH child seat tether anchors and lower
anchors (if equipped), and attaching hardware, should be inspected after
a collision. Mazda recommends that all seat belt assemblies used in
vehicles involved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was
minor and an authorized Mazda technician finds that the belts do not
show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be
replaced. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be
inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
The energy absorbing functions may have been activated in a collision so
the restraints should be examined; if the front airbags have deployed, the
pretensioners have also deployed and must be replaced — regardless of
whether there was an occupant in the passenger seat or not. The
optional side airbags are not connected to the pretensioners.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the seat
belt assembly under the above conditions could result in severe
personal injuries in the event of a collision.
Refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter.
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in
the various driving conditions that
are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility
vehicles and trucks are not designed
for cornering at speeds as high as
passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed
to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions.
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
• Keep tires properly inflated;
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts and children/infants must use
appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Study your Owner’s Manual and any supplements for specific
information about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and
additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS
4WD and AWD Systems (if equipped)
A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD (when selected) has the ability to
use all four wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may
enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power
transfer unit. 4WD vehicles allow you to select different drive modes as
necessary. Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures
can be found in the Driving chapter. Information on transfer case
maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this information
before you operate your vehicle.
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4WD
while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting
sound. These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to
speed and is not cause for concern.
WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD
and AWD vehicles. Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may
accelerate better than two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won’t stop any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles.
Always drive at a safe speed.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
SUV and trucks can differ from
some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may
be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it
to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
• Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest of a hill without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer
wheelbase.
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Narrower — to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, SUV’s and trucks often
will have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck or “LT” type tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as
defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Mazda Motor Corporation to give
you the following information about tire grades exactly as the
government has written it.
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Mazda Motor
Corporation.
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be inaccurate. Mazda recommends the use of
a digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or ЉblowoutЉ, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It
also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of
vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure and not appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Mazda recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Mazda recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see the Dissimilar spare
tire/wheel information section for description): Store and maintain at
60 psi (4.15 bar). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see the
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information section for description): Store
and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as
shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or
bulges.
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRE CARE
Inspecting your tires
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from
the tire and make necessary repairs. Also inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If
internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,
tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be
used because they are more likely to blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire replacement requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Mazda. The recommended tire and wheel size may be
found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If
this information is not found on these labels then you should consult
your Mazda dealer. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by
Mazda can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which
could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension,
axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If you have questions
regarding tire replacement, see an authorized dealer.
WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions
listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure
indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft. (3.66 m) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater
than the maximum pressure, a Mazda Dealer or other tire
service professional should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the
person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft. (3.66 m) away
from the tire wheel assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Mazda Motor
Corporation may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System.
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be damaged.
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do
not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and
cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five
seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side, vibrate or shake when you’re driving,
the wheels may be out of alignment. Have a qualified technician at a
Mazda dealer check the wheel alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by a qualified technician
at a Mazda dealer. Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension require alignment of all four wheels.
The tire should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
NOTE: When it is time to replace front tires with new ones, this is an
ideal time to perform an alignment. New tires should be balanced at the
time they are installed.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
Scheduled maintenance section of the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter) will help your tires wear more evenly, providing
better tire performance and longer tire life.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
• Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive
(4WD)/All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask a qualified technician at a
Mazda dealership to check for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire
imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans
and light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Manual. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods
of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure.
The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load
and inflation pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted
for the difference in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph
(130 km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the
following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating
Speed rating - mph (km/h)
81 mph (130 km/h)
87 mph (140 km/h)
99 mph (159 km/h)
106 mph (171 km/h)
112 mph (180 km/h)
118 mph (190 km/h)
124 mph (200 km/h)
130 mph (210 km/h)
149 mph (240 km/h)
168 mph (270 km/h)
186 mph (299 km/h)
M
N
Q
R
S
T
U
H
V
W
Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with
the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire
size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the
tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501
means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are
identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to
contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number
of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply
materials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon,
polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety
Compliance Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your
vehicle.
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set
lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for
service on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual;
defined as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades do
not apply to this type of tire.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service
on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.
In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge,
see Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly
maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire
failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Changing tires with TPMS
Each road tire is equipped with
a tire pressure sensor located
inside the tire/wheel cavity. The
pressure sensor is attached to
the valve stem. The pressure
sensor is covered by the tire and
is not visible unless the tire is
removed. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor. It is
recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized
dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter.
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four
road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The Low
Tire Pressure Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under
inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF,
your tire pressure still needs to be checked. Visit www.checkmytires.org
for additional information.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you
that the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on
your vehicle.
To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS
in this section.
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is no
longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the following
chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring System:
Low Tire
Possible
cause
Customer Action Required
Pressure
Warning Light
Solid Warning
Light
Tire(s)
1. Check your tire pressure to
under-inflated ensure tires are properly inflated;
refer to Inflating your tires in
this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended
inflation pressure as shown on the
Tire Label (located on the edge of
driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the
vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph
(32 km/h) before the light will
turn OFF.
Spare tire in
use
Your temporary spare tire is in
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel/tire and reinstall it on the
vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description on
how the system functions, refer to
When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
TPMS
malfunction
If your tires are properly inflated
and your spare tire is not in use
and the light remains ON, have
the system inspected by your
authorized dealer.
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Low Tire
Possible
cause
Customer Action Required
Pressure
Warning Light
Flashing Warning
Light
Spare tire in
use
Your temporary spare tire is in
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel and re-mount it on the
vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description of
how the system functions under
these conditions, refer to When
your temporary spare tire is
installed in this section.
TPMS
malfunction
If your tires are properly inflated
and your spare tire is not in use
and the TPMS warning light still
flashes, have the system inspected
by your authorized dealer.
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(20.7 kPa) for a drop of 30° F (16.6°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS
warning for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is
ON, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. If
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed
rating as those originally provided by Mazda. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Mazda can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally, the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause
steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, using snow tires and traction
devices may be necessary. If you need to use snow tires and cables, it is
recommended that steel wheels are used of the same size and
specification as those originally installed.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and traction devices:
• SAE class “S” cables should ONLY be used on the front axle for
P235/70R16 tires.
• Install cables securely, verifying that the cables do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables rub or bang against the
vehicle, stop and retighten them. If this does not work, remove
the cables to prevent vehicle damage.
• Avoid overloading your vehicle.
• Remove the cables when they are no longer needed.
• Do not use cables on dry roads.
• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from the vehicle when
using snow tires and traction devices.
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) with tire cables on your vehicle.
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should
carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Example only:
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) – is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle (including all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo).
The GVWR is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door.
The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR.
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural
damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal
injury.
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for
safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.
The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized
dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer) for more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to
2,875 lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may
lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1,400 lb. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.). In metric units (635-340 (5 x 68) =
295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg -
(5 x 99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• A final example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for
12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity
to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) -
(12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have
enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 -
540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least
240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then
the load calculation would be:
1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) -
(9 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and
utility-type vehicles
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation
of this type of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your
vehicle section in the Driving chapter of this Owner’s Manual.
WARNING: Loaded vehicles may handle differently than
unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with your vehicle may require the use of a trailer tow
option package.
Trailer towing puts additional loads on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires, and suspension. For your safety and to
maximize vehicle performance, be sure to use the proper equipment
while towing.
Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing procedure:
• Be sure to locate all the warnings supplied by the trailer rental or
sales company and study the unique requirements of each trailer you
intend to tow.
• Stay within your vehicle’s load limits.
• Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing. Refer to Preparing to
tow in this chapter.
• Use extra caution when driving while trailer towing. Refer to Driving
while you tow in this chapter.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. Refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance” section of this manual.
• Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least
1,000 miles (1609 km).
• Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the
proper installation and adjustment specifications.
Do not exceed the maximum loads listed on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. For load specification terms found on the label, refer
to Vehicle loading in this chapter. Remember to figure in the tongue
load of your loaded vehicle when figuring the total weight.
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
4x2
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Engine
Maximum
GCWR - lb
(kg)
Trailer Weight
Range - lb (kg) frontal area of
Maximum
trailer - ft2
(m2)
2.5L w/manual
transmission
2.5L
4980 (2259)
5040 (2286)
1500 (680)
1500 (680)
24 (2.2)
24 (2.2)
w/automatic
transmission
3.0L
7120 (3230)
3500 (1588)
30 (2.8)
w/automatic
transmission
Notes: For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft.
(300 meters) elevation. For definitions of terms and instructions on
calculating your vehicle’s load, refer to Vehicle Loading in this
chapter. Maximum trailer weights shown. The combined weight of the
completed towing vehicle and the loaded trailer must not exceed the
GCWR.
The Tribute is capable of pulling the maximum trailer weight(s) as
specified above. Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. The Tribute vehicle electrical system is not
equipped to accommodate electric trailer brakes.
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
4x4
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Engine
Maximum
GCWR - lb
(kg)
Trailer Weight
Range - lb (kg) frontal area of
Maximum
trailer - ft2
(m2)
2.5L
5180 (2350)
7260 (3293)
1500 (680)
24 (2.2)
30 (2.8)
w/automatic
transmission
3.0L
3500 (1588)
w/automatic
transmission
Notes: For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft.
(300 meters) elevation. For definitions of terms and instructions on
calculating your vehicle’s load, refer to Vehicle Loading in this
chapter. Maximum trailer weights shown. The combined weight of the
completed towing vehicle and the loaded trailer must not exceed the
GCWR.
The Tribute is capable of pulling the maximum trailer weight(s) as
specified above. Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. The Tribute vehicle electrical system is not
equipped to accommodate electric trailer brakes.
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight
exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in:
• engine damage
• transmission damage
• structural damage
• loss of control
• personal injury
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. See your authorized Mazda dealer.
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Hitches
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle bumper. Use a load
carrying hitch. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that
10–15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric, manual, automatic or surge-type brakes, if compatible with the
vehicle, are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not
have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision
greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. Do not
connect trailer lamps directly to your vehicle’s tail lamps. This can cause
damage to your vehicle’s electrical system. See your authorized Mazda
dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for
hooking up trailer lamps.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• To ensure proper “break-in” of powertrain components, do not trailer
tow during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of a new vehicle.
• To ensure proper “break-in” of powertrain components during the first
500 miles (800 km) of trailer towing, drive no faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) with no full throttle starts.
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
• To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist
in transmission cooling. For additional information, refer to Automatic
transmission operation in the Driving chapter.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for more information.
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do
not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become
less effective.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park)
(automatic transmission) or N (Neutral) (manual transmissions).
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
Launching or retrieving a boat
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval,
• Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter critical vehicle
components, adversely affecting driveability, emissions, reliability
and causing internal transmission damage.
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been
submerged in water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be
checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or repair required.
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the
water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the trailer is removed
from the water. Water entering these areas, while connected, could
short-circuit the system.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Follow these guidelines for your specific powertrain combination to tow
your vehicle for personal travel (such as behind a motor home or a
truck).
In case of roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, please refer to
Wrecker towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to your vehicle.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles:
Tow your Front Wheel Drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground
or with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly. If you are
using a tow dolly follow the instructions specified by the equipment
provider.
Note: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, follow
these instructions:
• Tow only in the forward direction.
• Release the parking brake.
• Place the transmission shift lever in (N) Neutral.
• Place the ignition to the accessory position (refer to Starting in the
Driving chapter).
• Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h) with manual transmission vehicles
and 65 mph (105 km/h) for automatic transmission vehicles.
• Start the engine and allow it to run for five minutes at the beginning
of each day and at each fuel stop.
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) vehicles:
Tow your Four Wheel Drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or
with all four wheels off the ground using a vehicle transport trailer. Do
not tow your Four Wheel Drive vehicle with the front wheels off
the ground (by using a tow dolly) and the rear wheels on the
ground. This will cause damage to your 4WD system. If you are using a
vehicle transport trailer, follow the instruction specified by the
equipment provider.
Note: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, follow
these instructions:
• Tow only in the forward direction.
• Release the parking brake.
• Place the transmission shift lever in (N) Neutral.
• Place the ignition to the accessory position (refer to Starting in the
Driving chapter).
• Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h) with manual transmission vehicles
and 65 mph (105 km/h) for automatic transmission vehicles.
• Start the engine and allow it to run for five minutes at the beginning
of each day and at each fuel stop.
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. Off— locks the gearshift lever
and steering column and allows
key removal.
2. Accessory— allows the
electrical accessories such as
the radio to operate while the
engine is not running.
3. On— all electrical circuits
operational and warning lights
will illuminate. This is the
position the key is in when you’re driving.
4. Start— cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system.
Note: This system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment
standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of
radio noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, avoid pressing the accelerator
before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have
difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the
vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter.
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding against
exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions.
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your authorized dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
A computer system controls the engine’s idle revolutions per minute
(RPM). When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs higher than normal in
order to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their seat belts. For
more information on seat belts and their proper usage, refer to the
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off.
If starting a vehicle with an
automatic transmission:
• Make sure the parking brake is
set.
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
• Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
If starting a vehicle with a manual
transmission:
• Make sure the parking brake is
set.
• Push the clutch pedal to the
floor.
3. Turn the key to 3 (on) without
turning the key to 4 (start).
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information
regarding the warning lights.
Starting the engine
1. Turn the key to 3 (on) without
turning the key to 4 (start). If there
is difficulty in turning the key,
rotate the steering wheel until the
key turns freely. This condition may
occur when:
• the front wheels are turned
• a front wheel is against the curb
2. Turn the key to 4 (start), then
release the key as soon as the
engine begins cranking. Your vehicle has a computer assisted cranking
system that assists in starting the engine. After releasing the key from
the 4 (start) position, the engine may continue cranking for up to
10 seconds or until the vehicle starts.
Note: Cranking may be stopped at any time by turning the key to the off
position.
3. After idling for a few seconds, apply the brake, shift into gear and
drive.
Note: If the engine does not start on the first try, turn the key to the off
position, wait 10 seconds and try step 2 again. If the engine still fails to
start, press the accelerator to the floor and try step 2 again, keeping the
accelerator on the floor until the engine begins to accelerate above
cranking speeds; this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off
in case the engine is flooded with fuel.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Although odorless and colorless, carbon monoxide is present in exhaust
fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.
WARNING: If you ever smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside
your vehicle, have your authorized dealer inspect and fix your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. These
fumes are harmful and result in accident or death.
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems checked whenever:
• the vehicle is raised for service.
• the sound of the exhaust system changes.
• the vehicle has been damaged in a collision.
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped in an open area for
long periods of time, open the windows at least once inch (2.5 cm).
Adjust the heating or air conditioning (if equipped) to bring in fresh air.
Note: Improve vehicle ventilation by
keeping all air inlet vents clear of
snow, leaves and other debris.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and allows the heater/defroster system to respond quickly. If your vehicle
is equipped with this system, your equipment includes a heater element
which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows
the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt a/c electrical
source. The block heater system is most effective when outdoor
temperatures reach below 0°F (-18°C).
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions
could result in property damage or physical injury.
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use
your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged
(cheater) adapters.
Prior to using the engine block heater, follow these recommendations for
proper and safe operation:
• For your safety, use an outdoor extension cord that is product
certified by Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). Use only an extension cord that can be used
outdoors, in cold temperatures, and is clearly marked ЉSuitable for Use
with Outdoor Appliances.Љ Never use an indoor extension cord
outdoors; it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard.
• Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord, minimum.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords. Instead, use one extension cord
which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to
the outlet without stretching.
• Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition (not
patched or spliced). Store your extension cord indoors at
temperatures above 32°F (0°C). Outdoor conditions can deteriorate
extension cords over a period of time.
• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged (cheater) adapters.
Also ensure that the block heater, especially the cord, is in good
condition before use.
• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug /engine
block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order
to prevent possible shock or fire.
• Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of
all combustibles such as petroleum products, dust, rags, paper and
similar items.
• Be sure that the engine block heater, heater cord and extension cord
are solidly connected. A poor connection can cause the cord to
become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire. Be sure
to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system
has been operating for approximately a half hour.
• Finally, have the engine block heater system checked during your fall
tune-up to be sure it’s in good working order.
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
How to use the engine block heater
Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. To clean
them, use a dry cloth.
Depending on the type of factory installed equipment, your engine block
heater system may consume anywhere between 400 watts or 1000 watts
of energy per hour. Your factory installed block heater system does not
have a thermostat; however, maximum temperature is attained after
approximately three hours of operation. Block heater operation longer
than three hours will not improve system performance and will
unnecessarily use additional electricity.
Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the
vehicle. While not in use, make sure the protective cover seals the
prongs of the engine block heater cord plug.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Refer to Brake system warning
!
P
light in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
system warning light.
BRAKE
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Since your vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS),
a noise from the hydraulic pump motor and pulsation in the pedal may
be observed during ABS braking events. Pedal pulsation coupled with
noise while braking under panic conditions or on loose gravel, bumps,
wet or snowy roads is normal and indicates proper functioning of the
vehicle’s anti-lock brake system.
NOTE: The ABS performs a self-check after you start the engine and
begin to drive away.
A brief mechanical noise may be heard during this test. This is normal. If
a malfunction is found, the ABS warning light will come on. If the vehicle
has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
The ABS operates by detecting the
onset of wheel lockup during brake
applications and compensates for
this tendency. The wheels are
prevented from locking even when
the brakes are firmly applied. The
accompanying illustration depicts
the advantage of an ABS equipped
vehicle (on bottom) to a non-ABS
equipped vehicle (on top) during hard braking with loss of front braking
traction.
WARNING: The Anti-Lock system does not decrease the time
necessary to apply the brakes or always reduce stopping
distance. Always leave enough room between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you to stop.
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However,
the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
ABS
when the ignition is turned on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled,
normal braking is still effective. If
your BRAKE warning lamp
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately by an authorized dealer.
!
P
BRAKE
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Parking brake
Apply the parking brake whenever
the vehicle is parked. To set the
parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down until the pedal
stops.
The BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster illuminates and
remains illuminated (when the
ignition is turned on) until the
parking brake is released.
!
P
BRAKE
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission).
Note: The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.
Pull the release lever to release the
brake.
Driving with the parking brake
on will cause the brakes to wear
out quickly and reduce fuel
economy.
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) SYSTEM
WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system,
aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction and/or wheel/tire size may change the handling
characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the the
performance of the Electronic Stability Control system. In addition,
installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely
affect the Electronic Stability Control system. Install any aftermarket
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console, the
tunnel, and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering
with the Electronic Stability Control sensors. Reducing the
effectiveness of the Electronic Stability Control system could lead to an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot
defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a
vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your
vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the Electronic Stability Control system is an indication
that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the
road; this could reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle,
potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your Electronic Stability Control system
activates, SLOW DOWN.
WARNING: If a failure has been detected within the Electronic
Stability Control system, the Љsliding carЉ icon
will illuminate
steadily. Verify that the Electronic Stability Control system is not
manually disabled (push the Electronic Stability Control “Off “ button
located on the center of the instrument panel). If the Љsliding carЉ
icon
still illuminates steadily, have the system service by an
authorized dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle with Electronic
Stability Control disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
The Electronic Stability Control system provides the following stability
enhancement features for certain driving situations:
• Traction Control (TCS), which functions to help avoid drive-wheel
spin and loss of traction.
• Dynamic Stability Control (DSC), which functions to help avoid skids
or lateral slides
• Roll Stability Control™ (RSC), which functions to help avoid a
vehicle roll-over.
The Electronic Stability Control system automatically enables each time
the engine is started. All features of the Electronic Stability Control
system (TCS, DSC, and RSC) are active and monitor the vehicle from
start-up. However, the system will only intervene if the driving situation
requires it.
The Electronic Stability Control
system includes an Electronic
Stability Control ЉOffЉ button on the
center of the instrument panel, and
a “sliding car” icon
instrument cluster. The “sliding car”
icon in the instrument cluster will illuminate temporarily during
in the
start-up as part of a normal system self-check, or during driving if a
driving situation causes the Electronic Stability Control system to
operate. If the “sliding car” icon
illuminates steadily, verify that the
Electronic Stability Control system is not manually disabled by pressing
the Electronic Stability Control ЉOffЉ button located on the center stack
of the instrument panel. If the “sliding car” icon
remains steadily
illuminated, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately.
When Electronic Stability Control performs a normal system self-check,
some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake, and/or a
rumble, grunting, or grinding noise after startup and when driving off.
When an event occurs that activates Electronic Stability Control you may
experience the following:
• A slight deceleration of the vehicle
• The “sliding car”
indicator light will flash.
• A vibration in the pedal when your foot is on the brake pedal
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
• If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the
brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces. You
may also hear a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during
this severe condition.
• The brake pedal may feel stiffer than usual.
Traction Control (TCS)
Traction Control is a driver aid feature that helps your vehicle maintain
traction of the wheels, typically when driving on slippery and/or hilly
road surfaces, by detecting and controlling wheel spin.
Excessive wheel spin is controlled in two ways, which may work
separately or in tandem: Engine Traction Control and Brake Traction
Control. Engine Traction Control works to limit drive-wheel spin by
momentarily reducing engine power. Brake Traction Control works to
limit wheel spin by momentarily applying the brakes to the wheel that is
slipping. Traction Control is most active at low speeds.
During Traction Control events the “sliding car” icon
instrument cluster will flash.
in the
If the Traction Control system is activated excessively in a short period
of time, the braking portion of the system may become temporarily
disabled to allow the brakes to cool down. In this situation, Traction
Control will use only engine power reduction or transfer to help control
the wheels from over-spinning. When the brakes have cooled down, the
system will regain all features. Anti-lock braking, RSC, and DSC are not
affected by this condition and will continue to function during the
cool-down period.
The Engine Traction Control and Brake Traction Control system may be
deactivated in certain situations. See the Switching Off Electronic
Stability Control section following.
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) may enhance your vehicle’s directional
stability during adverse maneuvers, for example when cornering severely
or avoiding objects in the roadway. DSC operates by applying brakes to
one or more of the wheels individually and, if necessary, reducing engine
power if the system detects that the vehicle is about to skid or slide
laterally.
During Dynamic Stability Control events the “sliding car” icon
instrument cluster will flash.
in the
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the Dynamic Stability
Control system, which include but are not limited to:
• Taking a turn too fast
• Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
• Driving over a patch of ice or other slippery surfaces
• Changing lanes on a snow-rutted road
• Entering a snow-free road from a snow-covered side street, or vice
versa
• Entering a paved road from a gravel road, or vice versa
• Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer (refer to Trailer
towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter).
The Dynamic Stability Control system may be deactivated in certain
situations. See the Switching Off Electronic Stability Control section
following.
Roll Stability Control™ (RSC)
Roll Stability Control (RSC) may help to maintain roll stability of the
vehicle during adverse maneuvers. RSC operates by detecting the
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which it changes and by applying the
brakes to one or more wheels individually.
During an event that activates the Roll Stability Control™ (RSC) the
“sliding car” icon
in the instrument cluster will flash.
Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the Roll Stability Control
system, which include:
• Emergency lane-change
• Taking a turn too fast
• Quick maneuvering to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
The Roll Stability Control system may be deactivated in certain
situations. See the Switching Off Electronic Stability Control section
following.
Switching Off Electronic Stability Control
If the vehicle is stuck in snow, mud or sand, and seems to lose engine
power, switching off certain features of the Electronic Stability Control
system may be beneficial because the wheels are allowed to spin. This
will restore full engine power and will enhance momentum through the
obstacle. To switch off the Electronic Stability Control system press the
Electronic Stability Control ЉOffЉ button. Full features of the Electronic
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Stability Control system can be restored by pressing the Electronic
Stability Control ЉOffЉ button again or by turning off and restarting the
engine.
If you switch off the Electronic Stability Control system, the sliding carЉ
icon
will illuminate steadily. Pressing the Electronic Stability Control
ЉOffЉ button again will turn off the Љsliding carЉ icon
.
In R (Reverse), ABS and the Engine and Brake Traction Control features
will continue to function; however, DSC and RSC are disabled.
Electronic Stability Control Features
“Sliding
Button
functions
Traction
Control
car”
RSC
D SC
icon
Illuminated
during bulb
check
Default at
start-up
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Button pressed Illuminated
momentarily
Button pressed
again after
solid
Not
illuminated
deactivation
Trailer Sway Control (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with Trailer Sway Control (TSC). When
properly equipped, trailer sway control will use the sensors of the
vehicle’s Electronic Stability Control system to detect and attempt to
mitigate trailer sway by applying brake force at individual wheels and, if
necessary, by reducing engine power. No driver action is required.
WARNING: Trailer sway control does not prevent a trailer from
swaying, it mitigates the sway from increasing once it has
occurred. TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. If you are
experiencing trailer sway, it is likely that the trailer is improperly
loaded for the correct tongue weight or the speed of the vehicle and
trailer is too high. Pull the vehicle-trailer over to a safe location to
check the trailer weight distribution and tongue load and reduce speed
to a safe level while towing. If trailer sway is experienced, SLOW
DOWN. Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
tongue weight recommendations. Refer to the Trailer towing section
in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter of this owner’s manual
for more information on towing a trailer with your vehicle.
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
During Trailer Sway Control events the
icon in the instrument cluster
will flash momentarily. In some cases when trailer sway is detected, the
vehicle speed is too high and may be at or above a speed at which trailer
sway will grow continuously. This may cause the system to activate
multiple times, causing a gradual reduction in speed.
Disabling Trailer Sway Control
Trailer sway control can be disabled during any key cycle. Pressing and
holding the Electronic Stability Control button for more than five
seconds will disable the Trailer Sway Control feature and the
icon will
flash momentarily and then illuminate solid for that ignition cycle. Trailer
Sway Control can be re-enabled by momentarily pressing the Electronic
Stability Control button. Trailer Sway Control will also be re-enabled at
each new key cycle.
WARNING: Turning off Trailer Sway Control increases the risk
of loss of vehicle control, serious injury, or death. Mazda does
not recommend disabling this feature except in situations where speed
reduction may be detrimental (e.g., hill climbing), the driver has
significant trailer towing experience, and can control trailer sway and
maintain safe operation.
STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Power-Assisted Steering
(EPAS) system. There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving (or if the
ignition is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes
more effort. Under extreme usage conditions, the steering effort may
increase. This occurs to prevent overheating and permanent damage to
your steering system. If this should occur, you will neither lose the ability
to steer the vehicle manually nor will it cause permanent damage.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers will allow the system to cool and
steering assist will return to normal.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper steering alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
PREPARING TO DRIVE
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
Utility vehicles and trucks have larger tires and increased ground
clearance, giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger
car.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for
cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed or abrupt maneuvers in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.
WARNING: Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity,
may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Do not overload
your vehicle and use extra precautions, such as driving at slower
speeds, avoiding abrupt steering changes and allowing for increased
stopping distance, when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. Over-loading
or loading the vehicle improperly can deteriorate handling capability
and contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Brake-shift interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the on position unless brake pedal is depressed.
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the on position and the brake pedal depressed, it is possible that a fuse
has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not operating properly. Refer
to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
If the fuse is not blown, perform the following procedure:
1. Apply the parking brake, turn the ignition to off, then remove the
key.
2. Using a screwdriver or similar
tool, carefully pry out the small
Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock (BTSI) cover cap
located to the right of the
gearshift lever.
3. Insert a screwdriver or similar
tool straight down into the
access hole and press downward
while pulling the gearshift lever
out of the P (Park) position and
into the N (Neutral) position.
4. Remove tool and reinstall the BTSI cover cap.
5. Start the vehicle and release the parking brake.
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brakelamps are working.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. Drive slowly and carefully to your authorized dealer.
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Automatic Transmission Adaptive Learning
Your transmission is equipped with an adaptive learning strategy found in
the vehicle computer. This feature is designed to increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life of the vehicle. A new vehicle or
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation. Additionally, whenever the battery is
disconnected or a new battery installed, the strategy must be relearned.
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 6–speed automatic
transmission
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the front wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Depress the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the
LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive) with Overdrive
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through six.
D (Drive) with Overdrive Cancel and Grade Assist
Pressing the transmission control
switch on the side of the gearshift
lever activates two features at the
same time: Overdrive Cancel and
Grade Assist.
1. Overdrive Cancel
• Overdrive is deactivated.
• The transmission operates in gears one through five.
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
• The over drive cancel and grade
assist lamp in the instrument
cluster is illuminated.
2. Grade Assist
• Improves driving experience in hilly terrain or mountainous areas by
providing additional grade (engine) braking and extends lower gear
operation on uphill climbs.
• Provides additional engine braking through the automatic transmission
shift strategy which reacts to vehicle inputs (vehicle acceleration,
accelerator pedal, brake pedal and vehicle speed).
• Allows the transmission to select gears that will provide the desired
engine braking based on the vehicle inputs mentioned above. This will
increase engine RPM during engine braking.
Overdrive Cancel with Grade Assist is designed to provide optimal gear
selection in hilly terrain or mountainous areas. It is recommended that
you return to O/D (overdrive mode) on flat terrain to provide the best
fuel economy and transmission function.
To return to O/D (overdrive mode), press the transmission control switch
again.
• The over drive cancel and grade assist lamp in the instrument cluster
will not be illuminated.
• The transmission will operate in gears one through six.
O/D (overdrive mode) is automatically returned each time the engine is
turned off.
L (Low)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Will downshift to the lowest available gear for the current vehicle
speed; allows for first gear when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
1
2
3
4
5
R
Using the clutch
Manual transmission vehicles have a starter interlock that prevents
cranking the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
To start the vehicle:
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully set.
2. Press the clutch pedal to the
floor, then put the gearshift
lever in the neutral position.
5
1
2
3
4 R
3. Start the engine.
4. Press the brake pedal and move the gearshift lever to the desired
gear; 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
5. Release the parking brake, then slowly release the clutch pedal while
slowly pressing on the accelerator.
During each shift, the clutch pedal must be fully depressed to the floor.
Make sure the floor mat is properly positioned so it doesn’t interfere with
the full extension of the clutch pedal.
Failure to fully depress the clutch pedal to the floor may cause
increased shift efforts, prematurely wear transmission
components or damage the transmission.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the
clutch pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a
hill. These actions will severely reduce the life of the clutch and
could nullify a clutch warranty claim.
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Recommended shift speeds
Upshift according to the following charts for best fuel economy:
Upshifts during light to moderate accelerations and cruises (for
best fuel economy)
Shift from:
1-2
2-3
3-4
4-5
10 mph (16 km/h)
20 mph (32 km/h)
32 mph (52 km/h)
37 mph (60 km/h)
Reverse
Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift
into R (Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transmission.
1. Hold the clutch pedal down and
move the gearshift lever into
the neutral position.
5
1
2
3
4 R
2. From the neutral position, move the gearshift lever all the way to the
right, then move it down into the R (Reverse) position.
Note: The gearshift lever can only be moved into R (Reverse) by moving
it from left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) before shifting into R (Reverse).
This is a lockout feature that protects the transmission from accidentally
being shifted into R (Reverse) from 5 (Fifth).
If R (Reverse) is not fully engaged, press the clutch pedal down and
return the gearshift to the neutral position. Release the clutch pedal for
a moment, then press it down and shift to R (Reverse) again.
Parking your vehicle
1. Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position.
2. Fully apply the parking brake, then shift into 1 (First).
3. Turn the ignition off.
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
WARNING: Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move
unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the
parking brake fully.
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation
of this type of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in
this chapter.
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent 4WD System that
continuously monitors vehicle conditions and automatically adjusts the
power distribution between the front and rear wheels. It combines
transparent all-surface operation with highly capable four-wheel drive.
The 4WD system is always active and requires no driver input. It is
capable of handling all road conditions, including street and highway
driving as well as off-road and winter driving.
Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles
4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough
terrain. Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt
steering wheel motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel
from the outside. Do not grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects
such as rocks and stumps.
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Basic operating principles
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or rollover. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger
cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive
cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
If your vehicle gets stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in 1st gear or R (Reverse) (manual
transmissions) or P (Park) (automatic transmissions). Turn the ignition
to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger
cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive
cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and water
NOTE:
• If you must drive through high
water, drive slowly. Traction or
brake capability may be limited.
• When driving through water,
determine the depth; avoid water
higher than the bottom of the
hubs (if possible) and proceed
slowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall.
• Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating
driveshafts, halfshafts and tires. Excess mud on tires and rotating
driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive
components.
NOTE:
If the transmission Power Take Off unit or rear axle are submerged in
water, their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.
If the rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should be
checked and changed, if necessary. The rear axle is filled with a lubricant
that does not normally require a lubricant change for the life of the
vehicle. Rear axle lubricant quantities should not need to be checked
unless a leak is suspected.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Mazda Motor
Corporation joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill,
start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a
higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the
engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, Do not try to
turnaround because you might roll
over. It is better to back down to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually
shift to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. When you brake hard,
the front wheels can’t turn and if
they aren’t turning, you won’t be
able to steer. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the
vehicle. Rapid pumping of the brake pedal will help you slow the vehicle
and still maintain steering control.
Since your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not
“pump” the brakes.
Driving on snow and ice
• 4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
• Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
• Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
• Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop
any faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four
wheels. Do not become overconfident as to road conditions.
• Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other
vehicles for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one
of the lower gears. In emergency stopping situations, avoid locking of
the wheels. Use a “squeeze” technique, push on the brake pedal with a
steadily increasing force which allows the wheels to brake yet
continue to roll so that you may steer in the direction you want to
travel. If you lock the wheels, release the brake pedal and repeat the
squeeze technique. Since your vehicle is equipped with a Four Wheel
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), apply the brake steadily. Do not
“pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for
additional information on the operation of the anti-lock brake system.
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
• 4WD vehicles should be driven with traction devices as referred to in
Using snow tires and traction devices in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Mazda Motor
Corporation strongly recommends that you do not make modifications
such as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or
by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control.
Mazda Motor Corporation recommends that caution be used with any
vehicle equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or
pickup box cover).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-road usage.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is
not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
The hazard flasher is located on the
steering column, just behind the
steering wheel. The hazard flashers
will operate when the ignition is in
any position or if the key is not in
the ignition.
Push in the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will
flash. Press the flasher control again
to turn them off. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch
may have been activated.
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
This switch is located in the front
passenger’s footwell, behind a
flip-up cover, by the kick panel
access cover.
To reset the switch:
1. Turn the ignition to the off
position.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset
the switch by pushing in on the
reset button.
4. Turn the ignition to the on
position.
5. Wait a few seconds and return
the key to the off position.
6. Make another check for leaks.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
15
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Cartridge
maxi
fuses
—
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Fuse link
cartridge
2A
3A
4A
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5A
—
—
7.5A
10A
15A
20A
25A
30A
40A
50A
60A
70A
80A
Brown
Red
Brown
Red
—
—
—
Yellow
—
Green
Orange
Red
Blue
Tan
Natural
—
—
—
Blue
—
Pink
Green
Red
Yellow
—
—
—
—
Blue
—
Pink
Green
Red
Yellow
Brown
Black
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Black
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located on the
right-hand side of the center
console, by the instrument panel.
Remove the panel cover to access
the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the
top and bottom of the fuse cover to
remove.
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
The fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
30A
Protective Circuits
Not used (spare)
Brake On/Off switch
Not used (spare)
Moon roof
Brake Shift Interlock (BSI),
SPDJB
1
2
3
4
5
15A
15A
30A
10A
6
7
8
20A
10A
10A
15A
15A
10A
7.5A
5A
Turn signals, Stop lamps
Low beam headlamps (left)
Low beam headlamps (right)
Interior lights
Backlighting
Four wheel drive
Power mirror switch
Not used (spare)
FCIM (radio buttons), Front
display module
9
10
11
12
13
14
10 A
15
10A
Climate control
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
15A
Protective Circuits
16
17
Not used (spare)
All lock motor feeds, Liftgate
release, Liftglass release
Heated seat
Rear wiper
Datalink
Fog lamps
Park lamps
High beam headlamps
Horn relay
Demand lamps
20A
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
20A
25A
15A
15A
15A
15A
20A
10A
10A
20A
5A
5A
5A
10A
10A
10A
5A
Instrument panel cluster
Ignition switch
Radio
Instrument panel cluster
Not used (spare)
Restraints control module
Not used (spare)
Not used (spare)
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Four wheel drive, Electronic
power steering (EPAS)
PATS transceiver
Climate control
10A
36
37
38
5A
10A
20A
Subwoofer/Amp (Audiophile
radio)
39
40
41
20A
20A
15A
Radio
Front power point
Driver/passenger door lock
switches, Moon roof
Not used (spare)
42
10A
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
43
Fuse Amp
Rating
10A
Protective Circuits
Rear wiper logic, Heated seats
relay, Instrument cluster
Not used (spare)
Front wiper logic, Blower motor
relay
44
45
10A
5A
46
47
48
7.5A
OCS (restraints), PADI
(restraints)
Power windows
30A Circuit
Breaker
—
Delayed accessory relay
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is
located in the engine compartment.
The power distribution box contains
high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems
from overloads.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace
the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
The high-current fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
A
Fuse Amp
Rating
80A Midi
Protected Circuits
Electronic power steering module
(EPAS)
B
1
2
3
4
5
125A Midi
15A*
30A**
20A**
—
SPDJB
Heated mirror
Rear defroster
Rear power point (center console)
Not used
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Keep Alive power, PCM relay,
Canister vent
10A*
6
7
15A*
15A*
Alternator
Liftgate latch
8
9
20A*
Trailer tow parking lamps
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Front wipers
Starter
Blower motor
50A**
30A**
30A**
40A**
10A*
10
11
12
13
14
A/C clutch
Trailer tow turn lamps
15A*
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
—
Protected Circuits
Not used
15
16
17
18
19
40A**
40A**
20A**
30A**
—
—
—
—
—
Cooling fan 1
Cooling fan 2
ABS solenoid
Power seats
A/C clutch relay
Rear defroster relay
Fuel relay
Blower relay
PCM relay
20
21A
21B
21C
21D
22
20A*
15A*
—
Fuel pump
Fuel injectors
Not used
23
24
25
—
Not used
26
27
15A*
10A*
Ignition coils
PCM non mil-malfunction
indicator lamp
28
20A*
PCM mil-on malfunction indicator
lamp
29
15A*
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Powertrain Control Module
Cooling fan 1 relay
Starter relay
Cooling fan main relay
Cooling fan 2 relay
Reverse lamp relay
Not used
Trailer tow left turn relay
Trailer tow right turn relay
Trailer tow park relay
Liftgate latch relay
Not used
30A
30B
30C
30D
31A
31B
31C
31D
31E
31F
32
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
—
Protected Circuits
33
34
35
PCM diode
Start diode
Run/start, Reverse lamps, Rear
defrost relay
—
10A*
36
37
—
—
Not used
Not used
* Mini fuse ** Cartridge fuse
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you get a flat tire while driving:
• do not brake heavily.
• gradually decrease the vehicle’s speed.
• hold the steering wheel firmly.
• slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a conventional spare tire that is
different in one or more of the following: type, brand, size, speed rating
and tread design. If this is the case, this dissimilar spare tire is still rated
for your vehicle loads (GAWR and GVWR). This temporary spare tire is
not equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will
illuminate when the spare is in use. To restore the full functionality of
the TPMS system, all road wheels equipped with the tire pressure
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
Have a flat tire serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent
damage to the TPMS sensor, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels, and Loading chapter. Replace the spare
tire with a road tire as soon as possible. During repairing or replacing of
the flat tire, have the authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for
damage.
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire
Pressure Monitoring System and should not be used.
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
WARNING: Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) in the Tire, Wheels and Loading chapter for
important information. If the tire pressure monitor sensor
becomes damaged, it will no longer function.
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for
temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by
Mazda. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be
replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire
has a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Tow a trailer
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and
seek service as soon as possible.
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Stopping and securing the vehicle
1. Park on a level surface, set the
parking brake and activate
hazard flashers.
2. Place gearshift lever in P (Park)
(automatic transmission) or R
(Reverse) (manual
transmission) and turn engine
off.
Removing the jack and tools
The jack and tools are located under
the carpeted load floor.
Pull back the carpet away from the
liftgate, and remove the hardboard
cover. If your vehicle is equipped
with a cargo management system,
the jack and tools are in the forward
compartment under a lid.
Unbuckle the strap and remove the
jack and tools by pulling the right
side up first. Remove the tools from
the jack in order to remove the
spare tire from under the vehicle.
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Remove the lug wrench from the
jack in order to remove the spare
tire from under the vehicle.
Removing the spare tire or spare tire and tether (if equipped)
1. Insert the lug wrench through
the access hole in the rear
bumper.
2. Turn the handle
counterclockwise and lower the
spare tire until it can be slid
rearward and the cable is slack.
3. Slide the retainer through the
center of the wheel.
If equipped with a tether,
perform the following additional steps:
4. Lift the spare tire on end to
access tether attachment (1).
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
5. Use the lug wrench to remove
the lug nut from the spare tire
tether.
6. If not replacing the spare or flat
tire to the underbody storage
area, raise winch up into the
installed position.
7. Use the attached fastener strap
(2) to tie the tether end to the
winch actuator shaft (if
equipped).
Tire change procedure
WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or R (Reverse) (manual transmission).
WARNING: To prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block both
sides of the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of
the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
WARNING: Changing a tire is dangerous if not done properly. If
the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be
seriously injured. Be sure to follow the directions for changing a tire,
and never get under a vehicle that is supported only by a jack.
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
1. Block the diagonally opposite
wheel.
2. Loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise
but do not remove them until
the wheel is raised off the
ground.
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Before placing the jack under the vehicle, NOTE the jack locations:
• Front
View shown from rear of front tire.
Position the jack directly below the
protruding bolt.
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
• Rear
View shown from forward of rear
tire. Position the jack directly below
the stud on the rear trailing arm.
3. Position the jack according to
the guides and turn the jack
handle clockwise until the tire is
a maximum of 1 inch (25 mm)
off the ground.
Be sure to place the jack away
from the rear edge of the rocker
to avoid damaging the rear tire
spoiler (pictured).
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Never use the differentials as a
jacking point.
WARNING: To lessen the
risk of personal injury, do
not put any part of your body
under the vehicle while changing a
tire. Do not start the engine when
your vehicle is on the jack. The
jack is only meant for changing
the tire. Be sure any occupants
are out of the vehicle and in a safe
place.
4. Remove the lug nuts with the lug nut wrench.
5. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem
is facing outward. Reinstall lug nuts until the wheel is snug against
the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been
lowered.
6. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
7. Remove the jack and fully
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown. Refer to Wheel lug nut
torque specifications later in
this chapter for the proper lug
nut torque specification.
1
3
4
5
2
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Stowing the jack and tools
• Make sure the jack is fully
lowered.
• Reclip the tools onto the jack
making sure that the tools are
fully contained by the clips as
shown.
• Reinstall the jack in the pocket
with the left side first, then snap
the right side down.
• Ensure that the hold-strap
contains the jack and tools before snapping the buckle.
• Ensure that the jack and tools are oriented as illustrated.
Stowing the flat/spare tire
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.
If you are stowing a tire that requires reattaching it to the
vehicle with a tether, perform these steps first, then proceed with
the steps following.
1. Place tire on end with valve
stem facing rearward, away
from vehicle.
2. Place tether into bolt holes in
wheel and attach lug nut using
lug wrench.
3. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing down. If your
vehicle is equipped with aluminum wheels, remove the wheel center
cap.
4. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer
through the center of the wheel.
5. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its original
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle
increases significantly as the tire contacts the frame. The spare tire
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
carrier will ratchet when the tire is in the fully stowed position. The
spare tire carrier has a built-in ratchet feature that will not allow you
to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier ratchets with very little effort,
take the vehicle to your authorized Mazda dealer for assistance at
your earliest convenience. If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer
hitch, guide the tire with one hand; keep the rear of the tire tilted
down until the tire clears the bumper.
6. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame assembly. Push against
the tire to make sure it is tightly seated under the vehicle. Loosen
and retighten, if necessary. (Make sure that the tire does not contact
the bumper.)
WARNING: Failure to stow the spare tire may result in the
failure of the winch cable and the loss of the spare tire. A loose
tire on the highway is a very dangerous object to other people on the
road. Check to be sure the tire is firmly mounted; go to an authorized
dealer to have it re-mounted if you have any doubt about spare tire
security.
7. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire
pressure (every six months), or at any time that the spare tire is
disturbed through service of other components.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km)
after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel
removal, etc.).
Bolt size
Wheel lug nut torque*
lb.ft.
100
N•m
M12 x 1.5
135
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Mazda recommended replacement fasteners.
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with
the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in
motion, resulting in loss of control.
226
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole
prior to installation. If there is
visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole,
remove loose particles by wiping
with clean rag and apply grease.
Apply grease only to the wheel pilot
hole surface by smearing a “dime”
(1 square cm) sized glob of grease
around the wheel pilot surface (1)
with end of finger. DO NOT apply
grease to lugnut/stud holes or
wheel-to-brake surfaces.
OVERHEATING
If the temperature gauge indicates overheating and you experience
power loss, you hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine is
probably too hot.
If this happens:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way.
2. Shift the automatic transmission into P (Park) or the manual
transmission into the neutral position, and apply the parking brake.
3. Turn off the air conditioner.
WARNING: Steam from an overheated engine is dangerous. The
escaping steam could seriously burn you. Open the hood ONLY
after steam is no longer escaping from the engine.
4. Check whether coolant or steam is escaping from under the hood or
from the engine compartment.
• If steam is coming from the engine compartment: do not go near
the front of the vehicle. Stop the engine, then turn the ignition switch
to the ON position without starting the engine. The radiator cooling
fans will start to cool the engine.
• If neither coolant nor steam is escaping: open the hood and idle
the engine until it cools. If this does not lower the temperature, stop
the engine and let it cool.
5. Check the coolant level. If it is low, look for leaks in the radiator
hoses and connections, heater hoses and connections, radiator and
water pump.
If you find a leak or other damage, or if coolant is still leaking, stop the
engine and call an authorized dealer.
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
WARNING: When the engine and radiator are hot, scalding
coolant and steam may shoot out under pressure and cause
serious injury. Do not remove the cooling system cap when the engine
and radiator are hot.
See Adding coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications section. If
you find no problems, the engine is cool and no leaks are obvious,
carefully add coolant as required.
Note: If the engine continues to overheat or frequently overheats, have
the cooling system inspected. The engine could be seriously damaged
unless repairs are made.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
If you have run out of fuel and need to refill the vehicle with a portable
fuel container, see Running out of fuel in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter for proper fuel filling method using a portable
fuel container and the included fuel filler funnel. Do not insert the
nozzle of portable fuel containers or any type of aftermarket funnels into
the Easy Fuel™ Љno capЉ fuel system as it can be damaged. You must use
the included funnel in such circumstances.
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers
or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel™ system. This could
damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto
the ground instead of filling the tank, all of which could result in
serious personal injury.
JUMP STARTING
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if
exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could
result in injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission
vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission may cause transmission damage.
228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other
moving parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion
before you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight
and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
–
–
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
–
–
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
–
–
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
230
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
–
–
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the disabled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery
and the fuel injection system. NOTE: Do not use fuel lines, engine
rocker covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Removing the jumper cables
–
–
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
–
–
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
232
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
–
–
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
–
–
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Mazda has not
approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
On FWD vehicles, if your vehicle is to be towed from the front, ensure
proper wheel lift equipment is used to raise the front wheels off the
ground. The rear wheels can be left on the ground when towed in this
fashion.
If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using wheel lift equipment, it
is required that the front wheels (drive wheels) be placed on a dolly to
prevent damage to the transmission.
On 4WD vehicles, it is required that your vehicle be towed with a wheel
lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground to
prevent damage to the automatic transmission, 4WD system or vehicle.
234
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
Emergency towing
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle (without access
to wheel dollies, car hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle) your
vehicle (regardless of transmission powertrain configuration) can be flat
towed (all wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward
direction.
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral). Refer to Brake shift interlock
in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the
gear shift lever into N (Neutral).
• Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (U.S.A. MAINLAND AND HAWAII)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to
serve you. All Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the
tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement
regarding the service of your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Authorized
Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take the following
steps:
STEP 1: Contact Your Authorized Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest
and best way to address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved
by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS
MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of the
authorized dealer or the OWNER.
STEP 2: Contact Mazda North American Operations
If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting
your authorized dealer management, you can reach Mazda North
American Operations by one of the following ways:
Log on at: www.mazdaUSA.com.
Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local
Authorized Mazda Dealership in the U.S., can be found here.
By email at: www.mazdaUSA.com (Click on CONTACT US at the bottom
of the home page).
By phone at: 1 (800) 222-5500
By letter at:
Attn: Customer Assistance
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618–2922
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623–9734
Whatever way you contact us, please help us to serve you more
efficiently and effectively by providing the following information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration
or title or located on the upper driver’s side corner of the dash)
236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your authorized dealer’s name and location
6. Your question(s)
If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda
Distributor.
STEP 3: Contact Better Business Bureau (BBB)
Mazda North American Operations realizes that mutual agreement on
some issues may not be possible. As a final step to ensure that your
concerns are being fairly considered, Mazda North American Operations
has agreed to participate in a dispute settlement program administered
by the Better Business Bureau (BBB) system, at no cost to you the
consumer.
BBB AUTO LINE works with consumers and the manufacturer in an
attempt to reach a mutually acceptable resolution of any warranty
related concerns. If the BBB is not able to facilitate a settlement they
will provide an informal hearing before an arbitrator.
You are required to resort to BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or
seeking remedies under the Federal Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15
U.S.C. § 2301 et seq. To the extent permitted by the applicable state
“Lemon Law”, you are also required to resort to BBB AUTO LINE before
exercising any rights or seeking remedies under the “Lemon Law.” If you
choose to seek remedies that are not created by the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act or the applicable state “Lemon Law, “ you are not required
to first use BBB AUTO LINE.
The whole process normally takes 40 days or less. The arbitration
decision is not binding on you or Mazda else you accept the decision. For
more information about BBB AUTO LINE, including current eligibility
standards, please call 1-800-955-5100 or visit the BBB website at
www.lemonlaw.bbb.org.
Being truly committed to customer satisfaction is more than a phrase
with Mazda. We hope to satisfy every customer directly, but if there is
ever a question about our decision, Mazda believes in providing a fast,
fair and free method such as the BBB AUTO LINE to ensure Mazda
delivers on our commitment to do the right thing for our customers!
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (CANADA)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to
serve you. All Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the
tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition.
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
In our experience, any questions, problems or complaints regarding the
operation of your Mazda or any other general service transactions are
most effectively resolved by your authorized dealer. If the cause of your
dissatisfaction cannot adequately be addressed by normal authorized
dealer procedures, we recommend that you take the following steps:
STEP 1: Contact Your Authorized Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with a member of authorized dealer management. If
the Service Manager has already reviewed your concerns, contact the
owner of the authorized dealer or its General Manager.
STEP 2: Call the Mazda Regional Office
If you feel that you still require assistance, ask the authorized dealer
Service Manager to arrange for you to meet the local Mazda Service
Representative. If more expedient, contact Mazda Canada Inc. Regional
Office nearest you for such arrangements.
STEP 3: Contact the Mazda Customer Relations Department
If still not substantially satisfied, contact the Customer Relations
Department, Mazda Canada Inc., 55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill, Ontario
L4B 3K5 Canada TEL: 1 (800) 263–4680.
Provide the Department with the following information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Refer to Vehicle identification
label in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter of this manual
for the location of the VIN.
4. Purchase date.
5. Present odometer reading.
6. Your authorized dealer’s name and location
7. The nature of your problem and/or cause of dissatisfaction.
The Department, in cooperation with the local Mazda Service
Representative, will review the case to determine if everything possible
has been done to ensure your satisfaction.
Please recognize that the resolution of service problems in most cases
requires the use of your authorized dealer’s service facilities, personnel
and equipment. We urge you to follow the above three steps in sequence
therefore for most effective results.
238
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
Mediation/Arbitration Program
Occasionally a customer concern cannot be resolved through Mazda’s
Customer Satisfaction Program. If after exhausting procedures in this
manual, your concern is still not resolved, you have another option.
Mazda Canada Inc. participates in an arbitration program administered
by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). CAMVAP will
advise you about how your concern may be reviewed and resolved by an
independent third party through binding arbitration.
Your complete satisfaction is the goal of Mazda Canada Inc. and our
authorized dealers. Mazda’s participation in CAMVAP makes a valuable
contribution to our achieving that goal. There is no charge for using
CAMVAP. CAMVAP results are fast, fair and final as the award is binding
on both you and Mazda Canada Inc.
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealerships. If a specific
item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached between an
owner, Mazda, and/or one of it’s authorized dealers (that all parties
cannot agree upon), the owner may wish to use the services offered by
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist
consumers in scheduling and preparing for their arbitration hearings.
However, before you can proceed with CAMVAP you must follow your
Mazda dispute resolution process as outlined previously.
CAMVAP is fully implemented in all provinces and territories. Consumers
wishing to obtain further information about the Program can obtain an
information booklet from their authorized dealer, the Provincial
Administrator at 1 (800) 207-0685, or by contacting the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Office At:
235 Yorkland Boulevard, Suite 407
North York, Ontario
M2J 4Y8
http://camvap.ca
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
Regional Offices
Regional Offices
Mazda Canada Inc.
Western Region
8171 Ackroyd Road
Suite 2000
Areas Covered
Alberta,
British Columbia,
Manitoba,
Richmond, B.C.
V6X 3K1
Saskatchewan,
Yukon
(604) 303–5670
Mazda Canada Inc.
Central Region
55 Vogell Road
Richmond Hill, Ontario.
L4B 3K5
Ontario
1 (800) 263–4680
Mazda Canada Inc.
Quebec Region/Atlantic Region
6111 Route Trans
Canadienne
Quebec,
New Brunswick,
Nova Scotia,
Pointe Claire, Quebec
H9R 5A5
Prince Edward Island,
Newfoundland
(514) 694–6390
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (PUERTO RICO & VIRGIN ISLANDS)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. That is why all
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep
your Mazda vehicle in top condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement
regarding the service of your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Authorized
Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take the following
steps:
STEP 1
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest
and best way to address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved
by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS
MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of the
authorized dealer or the OWNER.
240
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
STEP 2
If, after following STEP 1, you feel the need for further assistance, please
contact your area’s Mazda representative (Indicated on the next page).
Please help us by providing the following information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration
or title or located on the upper driver’s side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your authorized dealer’s name and location
6. Your question(s)
If you would like to write a letter, please address it to the following,
Attn: Customer Assistance
Plaza Motors Corp.
Mazda de Puerto Rico
P.O. Box 362722
San Juan, Puerto Rico
00936–2722
Tel: (787) 788–9300
This way, we can be sure to respond to you as efficiently as possible.
That is our goal.
If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda
Distributor.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity
(a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or
safety of the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total
of more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Mazda North American Operations
7755, Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618–2922
MAZDA IMPORTERS/DISTRIBUTORS
U.S.A (Importer/Distributor)
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618–2922
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623–9734
TEL: 1 (800) 222–5500 (in U.S.A.)
(949) 727–1990 (outside U.S.A.)
(Distributor in each area)
CANADA
Mazda Canada, Inc.
55 Vogell Road
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 3K5 Canada
TEL: 1 (800) 263–4680 (in Canada)
(416) 609–9909 (outside Canada)
PUERTO RICO & VIRGIN ISLANDS
Plaza Motors Corp. (Mazda de Puerto Rico)
P.O. Box 362722, San Juan, Puerto Rico 00936–2722
TEL: (787) 788–9300
242
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
GUAM
(d.b.a. Triple J. Enterprises, Inc.)
P.O. Box 6066 Tamuning, Guam
TEL: (671) 646–9216
SAIPAN
Pacific International Marianas, Inc.
(d.b.a. Midway Motors)
P.O. Box 887 Saipan, MP 96950
TEL: (670) 234–7524
Triple J Saipan, Inc.
(d.b.a. Triple J Motors)
Beach Road
Chalan LauLau
Saipan, MP 96950
TEL: (670) 235–4868
AMERICAN SAMOA
Polynesia Motors, Inc.
P.O. Box 1120, Pago Pago, American Samoa 96799
TEL: (684) 699–1854
WARRANTIES FOR YOUR MAZDA
• New Vehicle Limited Warranty
• Safety Restraint System Limited Warranty
• Anti-perforation Limited Warranty
• Federal Emission Control Warranty
– Emission Defect Warranty
– Emission Performance Warranty
• California Emission Control Warranty (if applicable)
• Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty
• Tire Warranty
NOTE: Detailed warranty information is provided with your Mazda
portfolio.
Outside the United States
Government regulations in the United States require that automobiles
meet specific emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore,
vehicles built for use in the United States, may differ from those sold in
other countries.
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle
to receive satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly
recommend that you NOT take your Mazda outside the United States.
However, in the event that you are moving to Canada permanently,
Mazda vehicles built for use in the United States could be eligible for
exportation to Canada with specific vehicle modifications to comply with
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety requirements.
Special Note: The above is applicable for permanent import/export
situations and not related to travelers on vacation.
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside
of the United States:
• Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or
low-octane fuel will affect vehicle performance and damage the
emission controls and engine.
• Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement
parts may not be available.
Please refer to your manufacturers warranty booklet for more
information.
Outside Canada
Government regulations in Canada require that automobiles meet specific
emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for
use in Canada, may differ from those sold in other countries.
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle
to receive satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly
recommend that you NOT take your Mazda outside Canada. However, in
the event that you are moving to the United States permanently, Mazda
vehicles built for use in Canada could be eligible for exportation to the
United States with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the
United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety requirements.
Special Note: The above is applicable for permanent import/export
situations and not related to travelers on vacation.
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside
of Canada:
• Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or
low-octane fuel will affect vehicle performance and damage the
emission controls and engine.
• Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement
parts may not be available.
Please refer to your manufacturers warranty booklet for more
information.
244
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
ADD-ON NON-GENUINE PARTS AND ACCESSORIES
Non-genuine parts and accessories for Mazda vehicles can be found in
stores. These may fit your vehicle, but they are not approved by the
manufacturer for use with Mazda vehicles. When you install non-genuine
parts or accessories, they could affect your vehicle’s performance or
safety system; the manufacturer’s warranty doesn’t cover this. Before you
install any non-genuine parts or accessories, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
WARNING: Installation of Non-Genuine Parts or Accessories:
Installation of non-genuine parts or accessories could be
dangerous. Improperly designed parts or accessories could seriously
affect your vehicle’s performance or safety system. This could cause
you to have an accident or increase your chances of injuries in an
accident. Always consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer before you install
non-genuine parts or accessories.
WARNING: Add-On Electrical and Electronic Equipment:
Incorrectly choosing or installing improper add-on equipment or
choosing an improper installer could be dangerous. Essential systems
could be damaged, causing engine stalling, air-bag (SRS) activation,
ABS inactivation, or a fire in the vehicle. Be very careful in choosing
and installing add-on electrical equipment, such as mobile telephones,
two-way radios, stereo systems, and car alarm systems.
Mazda assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may
result from the installation of add-on non-genuine parts or accessories.
SERVICE PUBLICATIONS
Factory-authorized Mazda service publications are available for owners
who wish to do some of their own maintenance and repair.
When requesting any of our publications through an Authorized Mazda
Dealer, refer to the chart below.
If they don’t have what you need in stock, they can order it for you.
PUBLICATION ORDER NUMBER
9999 95 062B 09
PUBLICATION DESCRIPTION
WORKSHOP MANUAL
WIRING DIAGRAM
9999 95 038G 09
9999 95 014C 09
OWNER’S MANUAL
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
WORKSHOP MANUAL:
Covers recommended maintenance and repair procedures of the drive
train, body and chassis.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
Provides electrical schematics as well as component location for the
entire electrical system.
OWNER’S MANUAL:
This booklet contains information regarding the proper care and
operation of your vehicle. This is not a technician’s manual.
Please note that your Authorized Mazda Dealership has trained
personnel and special service tools to correctly and safely
maintain Mazda vehicles.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash, or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Mazda Corporation.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or Mazda Corporation.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.
246
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
WAXING
Applying a premium paint sealant to your vehicle every six months will
assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.
• Wash the vehicle first. Refer to Washing the exterior for more
detailed information.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use a premium liquid wax.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
PAINT CHIPS
Your dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color. Touch-up
paint can be used to repair minor scratches to painted surfaces.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND COVERS
Aluminum wheel rims or covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish.
In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil
Remover (0000–77–410E-01), available from your authorized Mazda
dealer.
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Never spray the engine or other engine components with water. Water
will damage the engine or other engine components.
• Spray Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (0000–77–410E-09), available at
your authorized Mazda dealer, on all parts that require cleaning and
pressure rinse clean.
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
248
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
• 2.5L DOHC I4 Engine
• 3.0L DOHC V6 Engine
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use cool or lukewarm water with a neutral pH
shampoo.
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil
Remover (0000–77–410E-01), available at your authorized Mazda
dealer.
249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellant
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner
(0000–77–400E-01 and 0000–77–400E-02), available from your
authorized Mazda dealer.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or a
windshield washer concentrate. This washer fluid concentrate contains
a special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot
wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car
wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear
worn or do not function properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
INSTRUMENT PANEL / INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the interior trim areas and instrument panel with a damp cloth,
then with a clean, dry cloth, or use Mazda Deluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (0000-77-430E-15).
• Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners, as these may damage the
finish.
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the steering wheel, instrument panel or interior
trim areas to avoid contamination of the airbag systems.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
250
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, seat belts and seats equipped with side
air bags (if equipped):
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Upholstery Cleaner and Spot
Remover (0000–77–430E-01), available at your authorized Mazda
dealer.
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Spot and Stain Remover (0000–77–410E-01), available at your
authorized Mazda dealer.
• If a solvent ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the
entire area immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the seat where the side air bag (if equipped) is
mounted. Such products may contaminate the side air bag system and
affect performance of the air bag in a collision. The air bag may not
function correctly and not provide any injury reduction benefits.
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
• To clean, use a soft cloth with Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner
(0000-77-430E-15), available at your authorized Mazda dealer. Dry the
area with a soft cloth.
• To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Deluxe Leather Care
Kit (0000-77-609E-03), available at your authorized Mazda dealer.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
MAZDA CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Mazda dealer has many quality products available to clean your
vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products have been
specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom
designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle. Each
product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid
specifications. For best results, use these products or products of
equivalent quality. These products are available at your authorized Mazda
dealer.
252
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
INTRODUCTION
Be extremely careful to prevent injury to yourself and others or damage
to your vehicle when using this manual for inspection and maintenance.
If you’re unsure about any procedure it describes, we strongly urge you
to have a reliable and qualified service shop perform the work, preferably
an authorized Mazda Dealer.
Factory-trained Mazda technicians and genuine Mazda parts are best for
your vehicle. Without this expertise and the parts that have been
designed and made especially for your Mazda, inadequate, incomplete,
and insufficient servicing may result in problems. This could lead to
vehicle damage or an accident and injuries.
For expert advice and quality service, consult an authorized Mazda Dealer.
The owner should retain evidence that proper maintenance has been
performed as prescribed.
Claims against the warranty resulting from lack of maintenance, as
opposed to defective materials or authorized Mazda workmanship, will
not be honored.
Any auto repair shop using parts equivalent to your Mazda’s original
equipment may perform maintenance. But we recommend that it
always be done by an authorized Mazda Dealer using genuine
Mazda parts.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the
following conditions apply.
If any do apply, follow Schedule 2 (Canada and Puerto Rico residents
follow Schedule 2).
• Repeated short-distance driving
• Driving in dusty conditions
• Driving with an extended use of brakes
• Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are being used
• Driving on rough or muddy roads
• Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation
•
Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates
• Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
NOTE: After the described period, continue to follow the described
maintenance at the recommended intervals.
253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
SCHEDULE 1
I: Inspect and repair, clean, adjust, or replace if necessary
(Oil-permeated air filter cannot be cleaned using the air-blow method)
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
Maintenance Interval (Number of months or km (miles),
whichever comes first)
Months
6
12 18 24 30 36 42 48
54
60
66
72
Maintenance Item
x 1000 Miles
7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.6 75 82.5 90
(x 1000 Km) (12) (24) (36) (48) (60) (72) (84) (96) (108) (120) (132) (144)
ENGINE
Engine valve clearance (for 2.5L
engine)
Audible inspect every 75,000 miles (120,000 km), if
noisy, adjust
Engine oil
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
I
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
I
R
R
R
R
Oil filter
Drive belts (tension) 2.5L engine
3.0L engine
I
I
I
PCV valve (for 3.0L
engine)
*1
Replace every 100,000 miles (160,000 km)
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
2.5L engine
3.0L engine
Replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km)
Replace every 90,000 miles (145,000 km)
FUEL SYSTEM
Air cleaner filter
Fuel lines and hoses
R
R
*1
*1
I
I
I
I
I
Hoses and tubes for
emission
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system and hoses
Engine coolant (yellow)
I
I
Replace at first 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or
72 months; after that, every 50,000 miles (80,000 km)
or 36 months
Engine coolant level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
254
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Maintenance Interval (Number of months or km (miles),
whichever comes first)
Months
6
12 18 24 30 36 42 48
54
60
66
72
Maintenance Item
x 1000 Miles
7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.6 75 82.5 90
(x 1000 Km) (12) (24) (36) (48) (60) (72) (84) (96) (108) (120) (132) (144)
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and
connections
I
I
I
Disc brakes
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Drum brakes
Tire (rotation), check wheel lug
nut torque*3
Rotate every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
Tire inflation and wear
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Steering operation and linkages
Power steering fluid level
Manual transmission fluid
Automatic transmission fluid
I
I
I
I
I
I
Replace every 100,000 miles (160,000 km)
Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
Rear differential
fluid (4WD only)
*2
Transfer case fluid
(4WD only)
Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
Front and rear suspension ball
joints
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots
I
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and
body
Exhaust system heat shields
All locks and hinges
I
L
I
I
L
I
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
Washer fluid level
*1 According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these
items will not void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all
maintenance services be performed at the recommended time or miles (kilometers)
period to ensure long-term reliability. Refer to Fuel filter in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter for fuel filter replacement requirements.
*2 If this component has been submerged in water, the oil should be changed.
*3 The wheel lug nuts must be retightened to the proper specifications at 500 miles
(800 km) of new vehicle operation, at any wheel change, or at any other time the wheel
lug nuts have been loosened. Refer to Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specification in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification.
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
SCHEDULE 2
I: Inspect and repair, clean, adjust, or replace if necessary
(Oil-permeated air filter cannot be cleaned using the air-blow method)
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
Maintenance Interval (Number of months or km (miles),
whichever comes first)
Months
4
5
8
12
15
16
20
20
25
24
30
28
35
32
40
36
45
40
50
44
55
48
60
Maintenance Item
x 1000 miles
(x 1000 Km)
10
(8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96)
ENGINE
Engine valve clearance (for 2.5L
engine)
Audible inspect every 75,000 miles (120,000 km), if
noisy, adjust
Engine oil
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine oil (for Puerto Rico)
Oil filter
Replace every 3,000 miles (5,000 km) (or 3 months)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
I
R
R
R
R
R
Drive belts (tension) 2.5L engine
3.0L engine
I
I
PCV valve (for 3.0L
engine)
*1
Replace every 100,000 miles (160,000 km)
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
USA 2.5L
engine
Replace every 60,000 miles (96,000 km)
Replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km)
Replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km)
USA 3.0L
engine
Other *2
FUEL SYSTEM
Air cleaner filter
Puerto Rico
Others
R
R
I
R
Fuel lines & hoses
*1
*1
I
I
Hoses and tubes for
emission
256
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Maintenance Interval (Number of months or km (miles),
whichever comes first)
Months
4
5
8
12
15
16
20
20
25
24
30
28
35
32
40
36
45
40
50
44
55
48
60
Maintenance Item
x 1000 miles
(x 1000 Km)
10
(8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96)
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system and hoses
Engine coolant (yellow)
I
I
Replace at first 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or
72 months; after that, every 50,000 miles
(80,000 km) or 36 months
Engine coolant level
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Brake fluid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Disc brakes
Drum brakes
Tire (rotation), check wheel lug
nut torque *4
Rotate every 5,000 miles (8,000 km)
Tire inflation pressure and tire
wear
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Steering operation and linkages
Power steering fluid level
Manual transmission oil
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Replace every 100,000 miles (160,000 km)
Replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
Replace every 100,000 miles (160,000 km)
Automatic transmission fluid
Rear differential
fluid (4WD only)
*3
*3
Transfer case fluid
(4WD only)
Replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
Front and rear suspension ball
joints
I
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots
I
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
I
I
I
257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Maintenance Interval (Number of months or km (miles),
whichever comes first)
Months
4
5
8
12
15
16
20
20
25
24
30
28
35
32
40
36
45
40
50
44
55
48
60
Maintenance Item
x 1000 miles
(x 1000 Km)
10
(8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96)
Exhaust system heat shields
All locks and hinges
I
L
I
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
Washer fluid level
*1 According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these
items will not void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all
maintenance services be performed at the recommended time or miles (kilometers)
period to ensure long-term reliability. Refer to Fuel filter in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter for fuel filter replacement requirements.
*2 If the vehicle is operated under any of the following conditions, change the spark plugs
every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or shorter.
a) Repeated short-distance driving.
b) Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation.
c) Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates.
*3 If this component has been submerged in water, the oil should be changed.
*4 The wheel lug nuts must be retightened to the proper specifications at 500 miles
(800 km) of new vehicle operation, at any wheel change, or at any other time the wheel
lug nuts have been loosened. Refer to Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specification in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification.
OWNER MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The owner or a qualified service technician should make these vehicle
inspections at the indicated intervals to ensure safe and dependable
operation.
Bring any problem to the attention of an authorized Mazda Dealer or
qualified service technician as soon as possible.
When Refueling
• Brake and clutch fluid level
• Engine coolant level
• Engine oil level
• Washer fluid level
At Least Monthly
• Tire inflation pressures
At Least Twice a Year (For Example, Every Spring and Fall)
• Automatic transmission fluid level
• Power steering fluid level
258
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Retightening lug nuts
• Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km)
after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel
removal, etc.).
• Refer to Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specification in the Tires, Wheels
and Loading chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification.
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide necessary parts and service. Check your “Warranty Information”
to find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Genuine Mazda parts are designed and built
to provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING: A hot engine is dangerous. If the engine has been
running, parts of the engine compartment can become very hot.
You could be burned. Don’t inspect the coolant system or add coolant
when the engine is hot.
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other lit material away from the battery and
all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
• Automatic transmission:
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• Manual transmission:
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1
(First).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the engine on
• Automatic transmission:
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
• Manual transmission:
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in
N (Neutral).
2. Block the wheels.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under
the bottom of the instrument
panel.
2. At the front of the vehicle, lift
up on the auxiliary latch handle
located in the center between
the hood and the grille.
3. Lift the hood open and secure it with the prop rod.
260
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.5L I4 engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Automatic transmission dipstick (if equipped)
4. Brake/Clutch fluid reservoir
5. Air filter assembly
6. Power distribution box
7. Battery
8. Engine coolant bleed valve
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
3.0L DOHC V6 engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Air filter assembly
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick
5. Power distribution box
6. Battery
7. Coolant bleed valve
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Engine oil filler cap
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
262
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets Mazda specifications. Do not use any
special washer fluid such as windshield water repellent type fluid or bug
wash. They may cause squeaking, chatter noise, streaking and smearing.
Refer to the Maintenance product specifications and capacities
section in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure
to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or
accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
Checking and adding washer fluid for the liftgate
Washer fluid for the liftgate is supplied by the same reservoir as the
windshield.
263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm
away from the glass. Turn the
blade at a right angle to the
arm.
2. Squeeze the locking tabs to
release the blade from the arm
and pull the blade away from
the arm to remove it.
3. Attach the new blade to the arm and snap it into place.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield, refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
264
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Changing rear window wiper blade
The rear wiper arm is designed without a service position. This reduces
the risk of damage to the blade in an automatic car wash.
To replace the wiper blade:
1. Grab the wiper arm with one
hand close to the arm/blade
joint and pull it as far away
from the glass as possible. Do
not use excessive force because
it can break the wiper arm at
the heel. Hold it there until the
next step.
2. Grab the primary structure of
the blade with the other hand
close to the arm/blade joint.
3. Grip tightly and push on the arm/blade joint from beneath and
separate the blade from the arm.
4. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into
place until a click is heard.
If you find this procedure too
difficult, please see your dealer.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in
P (Park) (automatic transmissions) or 1 (First) (manual
transmissions).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick.
265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• 2.5L I4 engine
• 3.0L DOHC V6 Duratec engine
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it
again.
• If the oil level is within the lower and upper holes or lower and upper
lines, the oil level is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below the lower hole or the lower line, engine oil
must be added to raise the level within the normal operating range.
• 2.5L I4 engine
266
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• 3.0L DOHC V6 Duratec engine
• If required, add engine oil to the engine. Refer to Adding engine oil
in this chapter.
• Do not overfill the engine with oil. Oil levels above the upper
hole or upper line may cause engine damage. If the engine is
overfilled, some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized
dealer.
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only
certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine
oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
MAX, FULL or upper hole/mark (depending on application) on the
engine oil level dipstick.
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap
clockwise 1/4 of a turn until it is seated.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Engine oil and filter recommendations
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended
Look for this certification
trademark.
Use SAE 5W-20 motor oil certified for gasoline engines by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
Motor oil displaying the API certification trademark will meet all
requirements for your vehicle’s engine.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions,
lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in scheduled maintenance.
Mazda production and replacement oil filters are designed for added
engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used that
does not meet Mazda material and design specifications, start-up engine
noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Mazda oil filter or another
with equivalent performance for your engine application.
268
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Mazda maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician
immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral
position (manual transmission), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the
transmission must learn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and
will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
270
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
RECYCLE
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance. The coolant concentration
should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and water, which equates to a
freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant concentration testing is possible
with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as the Rotunda Battery and
Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The level of coolant should be maintained
at the “FULL COLD” level or within the “COLD FILL RANGE” in the
coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add coolant per the instructions
in the Adding engine coolant section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
• boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• an accurate temperature readout from the engine coolant
gauge.
271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
• The engine coolant should be at the“FULL COLD” level or within the
“COLD FILL RANGE” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
• Refer to scheduled maintenance section for service interval
schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
WARNING: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not
use engine coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside
of its specified function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
Use only Mazda Genuine Engine Coolant or a premium engine
coolant that meets a Mazda specification.
• DO NOT USE Extended Life Engine Coolant (orange in color).
• DO NOT USE a DEX-COOL engine coolant or an equivalent
engine coolant.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol antifreeze or any engine
coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze.
• DO NOT USE supplemental coolant additives in your vehicle.
These additives may harm your engine’s cooling system.
• DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your
vehicle. Make sure the correct coolant is used.
• DO NOT MIX recycled coolant and conventional coolant
together in your vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants may harm
your engine’s cooling system.
272
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• The use of an improper coolant may harm engine and cooling
system components and may void the warranty of your vehicle’s
engine cooling system. If you are unsure which type of coolant
your vehicle requires, contact your local authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid reservoir. If engine coolant is sprayed onto the windshield,
it could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Engine coolant concentrations above 60% or below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case of
emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the “COLD FILL RANGE”. For all other vehicles, which have a
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
Note: When adding more than 1 quart (.95L) of coolant, it is necessary
to use the coolant bleed valve. Failure to bleed the cooling system when
adding engine coolant may cause engine damage. Refer to the Cooling
section of the Workshop Manual.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the
engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by
following these steps:
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (an opaque plastic
bottle). Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins
to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Open the coolant bleed valve on the back of the engine water outlet.
(See Identifying components in the engine compartment earlier in
this section for the location of the bleed valve). If the bleed valve
leaks coolant when opened, there is no air in the engine. If the bleed
valve does not leak coolant when opened, leave it open and continue
to the next steps.
6. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture.
7. Close the bleed valve when coolant begins to seep from it.
8. Continue filling to within the “COLD FILL RANGE” or the “FULL
COLD” level on the reservoir. Reinstall the cap on the coolant
reservoir. Turn the cap until it is tightly installed to prevent coolant
loss.
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration.
Refer to the Checking engine coolant section. If the concentration is
not 50/50 (protection to –34° F [–36° C]), drain some coolant and adjust
the concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a
50/50 coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
damage).
274
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Recycled engine coolant
Not all coolant recycling processes produce coolant which meets
Mazda recommended coolants. Use of a recycled engine coolant
which does not meet the Mazda recommended coolant, may harm
engine and cooling system components.
Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner.
Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and
disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34°F [–36°C]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling (2.5L I4 engine only)
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot)
area.
• The service engine soon
indicator light will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to
increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
276
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel™ “no cap”
fuel system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death
if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a
cancer-causing agent.
277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
refueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and
never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never
smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is
pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.
278
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Refueling
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause
severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
• Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
• Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
• Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
• Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
• Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this is against the
law in some places;
• Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children
pump fuel.
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system
Your fuel tank is equipped with an Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel filler
system. This allows you to simply open the fuel filler door and insert the
fuel filler nozzle into the fuel system. The Easy Fuel™ system is
self-sealing and protected against dust, dirt, water and snow/ice.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the fuel filler door.
3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system. Pump
fuel as normal.
279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
4. After you are done pumping fuel, slowly remove the fuel filler
nozzle—allow about five seconds after pumping fuel before removing
the fuel filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain back into the
fuel tank and not spill onto the vehicle.
If the Check Fuel Fill Inlet lamp or Check Fuel Fill Inlet message comes
on, the fuel fill inlet may not have properly closed. The inlet may have
stuck open or debris may be preventing the inlet from fully closing. At
the next opportunity, safely pull off the road, turn off the engine, open
the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel fill
opening. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel (see
Refilling with a portable fuel container for funnel location) provided
with the vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and/or allow the
inlet to close properly. If this action corrects the problem, the Check
Fuel Fill Inlet lamp or Check Fuel Fill Inlet message may not reset
immediately. It may take several driving cycles for the Check Fuel Fill
Inlet lamp or Check Fuel Fill Inlet message to turn off. A driving cycle
consists of an engine start-up (after four or more hours with the engine
off) followed by city/highway driving. Continuing to drive with the Check
Fuel Fill Inlet lamp or Check Fuel Fill Inlet message on may cause the
Service Engine Soon lamp to turn on as well.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel™ “no cap”
fuel system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.
Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum
of 10% ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85), diesel, methanol, leaded
fuel or any other fuel. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and
could damage your vehicle.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause
powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and repairs may not
be covered under warranty.
280
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with a
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
We do not recommend the use of
gasolines labeled as “Regular” in
87
(R+M)/2 METHOD
high altitude areas that are sold with octane ratings less than 87.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. “Premium”
unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to
become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your authorized
dealer.
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It
should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and
could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of
using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your
warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-Wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-Wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-Wide Fuel Charter.
Cleaner air
Mazda endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the right
fuel section.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than
1 gallon (3.8L) may be required.
• The Service engine soon
indicator may come on. For more
information on the “service engine soon” indicator, refer to Warning
lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Refilling with a portable fuel container
With the Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system, use the following directions
when filling from a portable fuel container:
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers
or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel™ system. This could
damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto
the ground instead of filling the tank, which could result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or push open the Easy
Fuel™ system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank from a portable fuel container, use the
included funnel.
1. Locate the white plastic funnel.
It is attached to the inside of
the rear passenger side cargo
compartment access door.
282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
2. Slowly insert the funnel into the
Easy Fuel™ system.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container.
4. When done, clean the funnel or properly dispose of it. Extra funnels
can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel. Do not use aftermarket funnels; they will not
work with the Easy Fuel™ system and can damage it. The included
funnel has been specially designed to work safely with your vehicle.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend taking
fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate
measurement after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
284
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs. Unnecessary
shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance information.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA fuel economy estimates
Every new vehicle should have a window sticker containing EPA fuel
economy estimates. Contact your authorized dealer if the window sticker
is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA fuel economy estimates
should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons with other
vehicles. Your fuel economy may vary depending upon the method of
operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in the scheduled maintenance section
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the scheduled maintenance
section are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to
its emissions system.
If other than Mazda authorized parts are used for maintenance
replacements or for service of components affecting emission control,
such non-Mazda parts should be equivalent to genuine Mazda parts in
performance and durability.
286
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Illumination of the Service engine soon
indicator, charging system
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your “Warranty Information” for complete emission
warranty information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the Service
engine soon
a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the Service engine
soon indicator to illuminate. Examples are:
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed. See Easy
Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the Service engine soon
indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway
driving. No additional vehicle service is required.
If the Service engine soon
indicator remains on, have your vehicle
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the Service engine soon
indicator on can
result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M
test if the Service engine soon
indicator is on or not working
properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems have not been properly
checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered not ready for I/M testing.
If the Service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does not
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. Refer to the On board
diagnostics (OBD-II) description in this chapter.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the Service engine
soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing; if the Service engine soon
indicator stays on
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by
20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle
periods.
288
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID
Brake and clutch systems are supplied from the same reservoir.
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels between the “MIN” and
“MAX” lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating
range the performance of the
system could be compromised; seek
service from your authorized dealer
immediately.
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid
Refer to your scheduled maintenance section for scheduled intervals for
fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not consume fluid.
However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not
working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you
notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is warmed up
(approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic
during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be
turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before
checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine
compartment in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be
in the crosshatch zone for normal operating temperature.
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level is at the bottom of the dipstick
and the outside temperatures are
above 50°F (10°C).
Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperatures 150°F-170°F (66°C-77°C) on a level surface. The normal
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles
(30 km) of driving.
The transmission fluid should be in
the crosshatch zone if at normal
operating temperature (150°F-170°F
[66°C-77°C]).
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the
crosshatch zone may result in
transmission failure. An overfill
condition of transmission fluid
may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or
possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the
Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this
chapter.
290
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250 mL) increments through the filler
tube until the level is correct.
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
should be removed by an authorized
dealer.
An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause
shift and/or engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
Checking and adding manual transmission fluid (if equipped)
1. Park the vehicle on a level
surface.
2. Engage the parking brake fully –
put in first gear.
3. Ensure the vehicle cannot move.
4. Clean the filler plug.
5. Remove the filler plug, located
on the lower, forward driver
side of the transmission, and
inspect the fluid level.
6. Fluid level should be at bottom of the opening.
7. Add enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid level is
at the bottom of the opening.
8. Install and tighten the fill plug securely.
Use only fluid that meets Mazda specifications. Refer to the
Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this
chapter.
AIR FILTER
Refer to scheduled maintenance for the appropriate intervals for
changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, only use a genuine Mazda air filter
element.
291
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
1. Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover.
• 2.5L
• 3.0L
2. Pull the air filter housing cover away.
3. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing.
4. Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or
debris and to ensure good sealing.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter housing and cover. This could
cause filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not
properly seated.
6. Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps.
292
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
294
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Engine
2.5L I4 engine
152
87 octane
3.0L DOHC V6 engine
183
87 octane
Cubic inches
Required fuel
Firing order
Ignition system
Spark plug gap
1-3-4-2
1-4-2-5-3-6
Coil on plug
0.049–0.053 inch
(1.25–1.35mm)
Coil on plug
0.045–0.049 inch
(1.15–1.25mm)
10.3:1
Compression ratio 9.7:1
Engine drivebelt routing
• 2.5L I4 Engine
• 3.0L V6 Engine
295
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Compliance Certification Label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label is
located on the structure (B-Pillar)
by the trailing edge of the driver’s
door or the edge of the driver’s
door.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver side
instrument panel.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.
296
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) /
Restraint System
3. Vehicle line, series, body type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS
You can find a transmission code on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label . The following table tells you
which transmission each code
represents.
MFD. BY FORD MOTOR CO. IN U.S.A.
FOR MAZDA MOTOR CORPORATION
DATE: XX/XX
GVWR:XXXXXLB/ XXXXXKG
FRONT GAWR: XXXXL
XXXXKG
REAR GAWR:
XXXXKG
XXXXLB
WITH
TIRES
WITH
TIRES
RIMS
XXXX/XXXXXXX
XXXX.XX
XXXX/XXXXXXX
XXXX.XX
RIMS
AT XXX kPa/XX
PSI COLD
AT XXX kPa/XX
PSI COLD
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR
VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN
EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.
VIN: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TYPE: XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
EXT PNT:
XX
INT TR
XX
RC: XX
AXLE
XX
DSO:
WB BRK
TP/PS
R
X
TR SPR
XXXXX
XXX
XXX
X
X
XX
XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX
XXXX-XXXXXXX-XX
Description
Code
Five-speed manual
Six-speed automatic
3
6
297
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories
CELL PHONES
Use of cell phones and other devices by driver:
WARNING: Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices
by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Dialing a
number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver’s hands.
Use of these devices will cause the driver to be distracted and could
lead to a serious accident. If a passenger is unable to use the device,
pull off the right-of-way to a safe area before use. If use of a cell phone
is necessary despite this warning, use a hands-free system to at least
allow the hands free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cell phone or
other electrical device while the vehicle is moving and, instead,
concentrate on the full-time job of driving.
In addition, the gasoline distributors are warning against using cell
phones during refueling procedures, due to their increased concern
about static electricity fires in the self-service pump environment.
298
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
ABS (see Brakes) .....................184
Accessory delay ..........................55
Air conditioning
manual heating and air
servicing ..................................269
Airbag supplemental restraint
disposal ....................................123
operation .................110, 118, 121
passenger airbag .....110, 118, 121
side airbag ...............................117
anti-lock ...........................184–185
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
fluid, refill capacities ..............293
All Wheel Drive (AWD),
driving off road .........................200
Ambulance packages ....................7
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................271
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....293
Cargo area shade ........................62
Cargo management system ........63
CD ................................................19
Cell phone warning ...................298
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ......................184–185
Anti-theft system ........................77
Audio system (see Radio) .........19
Automatic transmission ............193
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................195
fluid, refill capacities ..............293
fluid, specification ..................293
Child safety seats ......................128
attaching with tether straps ..134
in front seat ............................129
in rear seat ..............................129
LATCH .....................................132
recommendations ...................126
Auxiliary input jack (Line in) ....27
Auxiliary power point .................53
Child safety seats - booster
seats ...........................................137
Axle
lubricant specifications ..........293
299
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Cleaning your vehicle
instrument panel ....................250
plastic parts ............................249
waxing .....................................247
wheels ......................................248
running out of fuel .........228, 281
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ............36
Clock ............................................19
Emergency Flashers .................207
Clutch
fluid ..........................................289
coolant .....................................271
fail-safe cooling .......................276
idle speed control ...................269
lubrication specifications .......293
refill capacities ........................293
service points ..................261–262
starting after a collision .........207
Console ........................................52
overhead ....................................51
Controls
power seat .................................86
Coolant
checking and adding ..............271
checking and adding ..............265
dipstick ....................................265
filter, specifications ................268
recommendations ...................268
refill capacities ........................293
specifications ..........................293
Cruise control .............................57
Cruise control
(see Speed control) ....................57
Customer
Assistance ..................236–237, 240
Event data recording ....................6
Exhaust fumes ..........................181
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................40
F
Dipstick
Fail safe cooling ........................276
Fluid capacities .........................293
Foglamps .....................................39
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................289
engine oil .................................265
300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles
turning on and off ....................39
driving off road .......................200
preparing to drive your
calculating fuel economy .......283
choosing the right fuel ...........280
comparisons with EPA fuel
I
economy estimates .................286
detergent in fuel .....................281
filling your vehicle with
Ignition ...............................178, 295
(see Safety seats) .....................128
filter, specifications ................277
improving fuel economy ........283
octane rating ...................281, 295
quality ......................................281
running out of fuel .........228, 281
safety information relating to
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
Instrument panel
cluster ........................................12
lighting up panel and
interior .......................................40
location of components ............12
G
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............279
Jump-starting your vehicle ......228
Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................283
K
Gauges .........................................16
Keyless entry system
autolock ...............................69–70
H
Keys .......................................67, 79
positions of the ignition .........178
Hazard flashers .........................207
Head restraints ...........................88
L
Headlamps ...................................39
aiming ........................................41
bulb specifications ....................44
daytime running lights .............40
Lamps
bulb replacement
specifications chart ..................44
301
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
cargo lamps ...............................40
daytime running light ...............40
fog lamps ...................................39
headlamps .................................39
interior lamps .....................43–45
replacing bulbs .........................45
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................265
Liftgate ..................................61, 74
Lights, warning and indicator ....12
Power distribution box
Load limits .................................164
Locks
autolock ...............................69–70
childproof ..................................72
Lubricant specifications ...........293
Lumbar support, seats ...............86
Preparing to drive your
M
Manual transmission .................198
fluid capacities ........................293
fluid, checking and adding ....291
lubricant specifications ..........293
reverse .....................................199
Mirrors ...................................55–56
fold away ...................................56
heated ........................................56
side view mirrors (power) .......56
Radio ............................................19
Recommendations for
attaching safety restraints for
children ......................................126
Relays ........................................208
Remote entry system ...........72–73
illuminated entry ................76–77
locking/unlocking doors .....73–74
opening the trunk .....................74
panic alarm ...............................74
replacement/additional
Moon roof ....................................59
Motorcraft parts ........................277
O
transmitters ...............................75
replacing the batteries .............74
Octane rating ............................281
302
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roof rack .....................................64
ambulance conversions ..............7
S
Specification chart,
lubricants ...................................293
extension assembly ................102
for adults ...........................98–100
Occupant Classification
Starting your
seat belt maintenance ............140
warning light and
Safety restraints - LATCH
Safety seats for children ..........128
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................296
Satellite Radio (if equipped) .....19
Satellite Radio Information ........32
Scheduled Maintenance ...........253
Seat Belt Maintenance .............140
inflating ...................................145
label .........................................158
replacing ..................................149
rotating ....................................152
safety practices .......................151
sidewall information ...............154
snow tires and chains ............164
spare tire .........................216, 218
terminology .............................145
tire grades ...............................144
treadwear ........................144, 148
Seat belts
(see Safety restraints) ..93, 97–101
Seats ............................................82
child safety seats ....................128
heated ........................................88
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ..........................................77
Servicing your vehicle ..............259
Setting the clock .........................19
Side-curtain airbags system
(if equipped) .............118, 120–121
Towing .......................................171
recreational towing .................176
trailer towing ..........................171
wrecker ....................................234
Snowplowing .................................7
Spark plugs, specifications .......295
303
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Transmission
Vehicle loading ..........................164
automatic operation ...............193
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....193
fluid, checking and adding
fluid, checking and adding
(manual) .........................289, 291
fluid, refill capacities ..............293
lubricant specifications ..........293
manual operation ....................198
Warning lights (see Lights) .......12
Washer fluid
..............................263
Water, Driving through
.............206
Trunk ...........................................63
Turn signal ..................................42
Windows
power
.........................................54
rear wiper/washer
.....................50
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers
U
..........................................49
checking and adding fluid
USB port ......................................29
.....263
V
liftgate reservoir
.....................263
replacing wiper blades
...264–265
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................296
Wrecker towing
.........................234
304
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|